Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Emailing The - Ultimate - Guide - To - Self - Publishing PDF
Emailing The - Ultimate - Guide - To - Self - Publishing PDF
ISBN-13:978-1501009945
|
ISBN-10:150100994X
C ONTENTS
Editing ............................................................................................................................ 37
Design ............................................................................................................................ 38
Title ................................................................................................................................ 39
Foreword/Introduction ................................................................................................ 42
Blurbs ............................................................................................................................. 43
Testimonials ................................................................................................................. 44
Kindle
.............................................................................................................................
52
Book
Proof
.............................................................................................................................
52
Hit
Publish
Only
After:
.........................................................................................................
52
Build
Your
Platform
......................................................................................................
54
T
he
traditional
publishing
industry
is
almost
completely
dead
and
they
dont
know
it.
Or
if
they
do
they
deny
it.
I
dont
blame
them
because
change
can
be
hard.
Since
the
year
2010
I,
personally
(and
as
a
completely
nobody)
have
worn
the
hats
of
publisher,
editor,
interior
layout
designer,
cover
designer,
audiobook
producer,
writer,
talent,
author,
co-author
and
ghostwriter.
And
that
is
among
a
myriad
of
other
professions
I
now
perform
including
video
producer,
sound
editor,
yoga
talent,
post-
producer
and
on
and
on
and
on.
Some
of
those
jobs
I
did
terribly,
some
I
am
getting
better
at.
But
no
matter
what,
with
every
step
Ive
learned
that
the
need
for
a
traditional
publisher,
or
any
other
gatekeeper
is
obsolete.
As
I
see
it
now,
I
am
a
full
publishing
house
in
one
person
and
there
is
nothing
stopping
you
from
doing
the
exact
same
thing.
Its
not
that
hard.
It
just
takes
dedication
and
a
lot
of
attention
to
detail.
Anyone
can
hit
publish,
but
doing
it
professionally
is
a
different
story.
That
is,
mind
you,
the
story
of
this
book.
Throughout
my
brand
new
street
education
on
self-publishing
I
got
to
talk
to
people
who
are
a
lot
smarter
than
me,
like
Tucker
Max,
Ryan
Holiday,
Stephen
Dubner,
Cheryl
Richardson.
All
people
who
have
been
best
sellers,
been
on
Oprah,
done
it
all.
My
eyes
opened
up
when
I
saw
that
publishing
a
book,
if
you
want
to
do
it
right,
is
a
big
deal.
How
much
you
invest
in
it
matters.
The
numbers
matter,
what
you
title
it
matters,
what
you
want
the
book
to
do,
for
example:
do
you
want
to
sale
lots
of
copies?
Get
credibility?
Spread
a
message?
Whatever
you
answer
to
this
is
matters
because
it
will
permeate
the
flavor
of
how
you
promote,
price,
and
speak
about
your
message.
On
the
other
hand,
the
question:
who
is
your
publisher?
is
the
most
irrelevant
of
them
all.
NOBODY
ever
asked
me
that.
Ive
never
seen
anyone
ask
James
that.
Nobody
cares.
Its
a
whole
different
world
out
there.
The
last
book
James
and
I
wrote
together
through
a
traditional
publishing
house,
The
Power
of
No,
sent
us
a
statement
of
debt
after
six
months
of
being
on
bookstores
all
over
the
country.
Not
only
did
we
not
make
any
money,
we
actually
owe
them
something.
This
is
of
course,
after
we
did
everything
for
the
book.
And
by
everything
I
mean:
the
marketing,
three
special
recordings
for
bonus
materials,
a
video,
all
the
writing,
all
the
mailing
to
our
own
lists,
all
the
promotions,
all
the
copy-writing,
all
the
speaking,
all
the
going
on
TV
(we
booked
our
own
TV).
And
still
we
owed
money.
The
book
made
it
to
the
prestigious
Wall
Street
Journal
list
of
bestsellers,
something
I
am
grateful
for,
as
anyone
would,
and
in
all
fairness
the
numbers
on
that
statement
of
debt
reflected
only
sales
for
one
month,
the
month
of
the
release.
I
am
sure
next
month
(six
months
later)
we
may
probably
break
even.
And
I
say
that
with
a
hint
of
hope,
in
reality
I
dont
know.
Whatever
amount
of
copies
we
sold
in
that
first
month
(which
we
do
not
know
because
we
dont
have
the
data)
did
not
cover
the
advance.
That
is
the
first
issue
I
have
with
the
publishing
industry
and
why
I
prefer
to
self-publish.
I
like
to
have
control
over
my
product,
my
costs,
weather
I
can
promote
it
to
different
audiences
and
what
I
do
with
it
in
general.
Guess
how
much
was
the
advance
for
The
Power
of
No?
It
was
$15,000.
I
kid
you
not.
And
this
was
right
after
the
huge
success
of
Choose
Yourself
which
sold
over
200,000
copies
and
has
since
grossed
over
$600,000+.
Please
note
that
I
am
a
fan
of
the
publishing
house
we
went
through.
Hay
House
treated
us
very
well,
they
are
a
small
shop
and
everyone
knows
all
other
members
of
the
staff.
It
is
not
the
people,
but
the
industry
that
is
in
trouble.
If
anything
I
am
extremely
grateful
because
I
find
that
ultimately
there
is
a
little
side
of
me
that
still
clings
to
the
idea
of
being
chosen.
Even
though
I
was
not.
They
chose
James
and
I
rode
along
because
he
chose
me.
I
did
my
finest
writing
but
I
free-rode
on
his
invitation
to
write
with
him
for
them.
People
now
care
more
about
how
the
book
looks
and
about
the
value
it
delivers
than
who
was
the
publisher.
If
a
book
has
a
good
message
and
it
looks
good
you
are
in,
regardless
of
what
logo
lies
on
the
back,
sucking
the
life
out
of
your
work.
But
lets
get
back
to
money.
There
is
no
money
in
publishing
through
traditional
means
anymore.
James
was
among
the
lucky
ones
to
get
those
$15,000.
Most
get
nothing.
Now,
of
course
if
you
are
Tony
Robbins
you
get
3
million
in
advance,
but
are
you?
Im
not.
So,
if
you
are
anything
like
me,
you
get
between
nothing
and
a
maximum
of
fifteen
thousand
dollars,
and
you
dont
get
to
set
the
price
at
which
you
sell
(which
is
key
as
you
will
soon
find
out)
and
you
dont
get
any
more
than
15%
on
the
royalties,
after
several
statements
of
debt.
There
is
however
a
lot
of
money
possibilities
for
those
who
self-publish
with
the
right
tools,
and
you
are
reading
the
right
book
for
that.
If
you
cannot
control
the
pricing
of
your
book
you
are
subject
to
the
traditional
ways
of
selling.
And
books
are
not
selling
traditionally
anymore,
that
word
died
a
long
time
ago.
For
example,
James
is
about
to
release
a
book
called
The
Choose
Yourself
Guide
to
Wealth
through
his
own
newsletter
and
by
invitation
only.
Anyone
on
his
list,
who
signed
up
on
his
website
(its
easy
to
do),
will
get
one.
My
own
latest
book
Become
An
Idea
Machine
will
be
a
premium
on
that
invitation
only
list.
This
may
sound
very
exclusive
but
it
is
not,
it
is
natural
selection,
it
is
the
way
we
transform
and
grown
when
we
are
passionate
about
writing
and
need
to
feed
families.
When
we
get
real,
we
realize
it
is
important
to
have
control
over
how
we
distribute,
sell,
price
and
market
our
books.
Power
lies
with
the
author.
I
love
it.
I
hate
to
see
bookstores
vanishing
as
much
as
the
next
person,
but
the
reality
is
they
are,
and
the
few
last
ones
standing
can
carry
only
so
many
books,
so
they
will
tend
to
load
up
on
copies
of
Fifty
Shades
of
Grey,
meaning
whatever
sales,
what
brings
in
money,
of
course.
Also,
there
are
now
websites
like
BuckBooks.net
where
you
strike
a
deal
in
which
you
pay
an
entry
fee
and
for
one
day
they
will
promote
your
book
to
their
enormous
mailing
list.
In
July
of
2014
I
saw
one
of
their
promoted
books.
It
had
been
written
in
the
80s,
and
it
hit
the
New
York
Times
list.
How
did
it
do
that?
It
did
that
because
the
whole
terrain
is
shifting
under
our
legs.
Note
that
the
New
York
Times
is
not
easy
to
hit.
We
had
a
whole
Ask
Altucher
episode
with
a
man
who
can
put
books
on
the
list
and
he
told
us
his
very
elaborate
system
to
make
that
happen.
Listen
to
episode
105
of
the
Ask
Altucher
show
or
read
the
transcript
at
the
end
of
this
book.
But
in
order
to
have
your
book
accepted
on
this
website,
which
is
not
the
only
one,
you
need
to
have
your
book
be
expensive
and
suddenly
lower
the
price,
so
it
is
a
bargain
and
they
can
offer
it
as
such
to
their
readers.
A
publisher
will
never
lower
the
price
because
you
want
to.
They
are
likely
to
do
nothing
ever
because
you
want
to.
As
a
matter
of
fact
they
just
fought
Amazon
so
that
they
could
charge
whatever
they
want
for
kindle
books,
which
I
think
is
fair,
and
better
for
us
self-
publishers.
I
am
happy
that
publishing
houses
want
to
charge
a
lot
of
money
for
Kindle
books.
Because
it
means
more
people
will
buy
mine.
And
yours.
Because
we
control
the
pricing.
If
you
self
publish,
as
soon
as
you
recover
from
the
panic
it
can
instill
on
some,
you
will
be
able
to
manipulate
the
price
and
do
deals
with
not
just
a
discount
websites
but
also
with
other
mailing
lists,
and
at
any
time.
This
book
is
about
re-gaining
control.
Gone
are
the
days
in
which
you
have
to
wait
six
months
to
maybe
see
a
10%
return
on
a
book
after
a
skim
advance
is
covered.
Now
you
can
start
collecting
your
own
royalties
right
away,
the
day
you
publish.
There
is
no
more
need
for
intermediaries.
When
I
heard
Amazon
would
give
me
70%
of
the
price
if
I
went
above
a
minimum
price
I
didnt
need
to
hear
anything
else.
Do
you?
Think
about
it,
in
the
old
fashioned
way
you
need
to
have
an
agent
who
will
take
a
cut
on
an
already
skim
advance,
and
then
pay
taxes.
In
Amazon
you
determine
your
pricing
and
then
you
get
the
most
of
the
money.
But
I
will
tell
you
an
even
better
secret.
Audible,
which
is
also
Amazon
and
who
will
sell
the
voice-
recording
of
your
book,
will
give
you
the
most
value
for
your
money.
I
had
to
convince
James
to
do
Choose
Yourself
in
audio.
He
did
not
want
to
because
it
takes
a
long
time
and
a
lot
of
effort
to
record
a
book,
it
is
hours
and
hours
of
talking,
and
it
is
exhausting.
But
it
pays.
Nicely.
Publishers
will
tell
you
they
will
help
you
market
your
book.
This
is
not
true.
Ive
seen
the
process
of
James
going
through
five
major
publishers
and
in
no
case
did
they
ever
do
any
marketing
at
all,
or
the
little
they
did
was
completely
ineffective.
In
this
time
and
age
the
marketing
is
on
you
and
me.
We
need
to
market
our
work,
and
there
is
a
section
in
the
book
dedicated
to
how
to
do
that.
We
need
to
build
the
platform,
the
audience,
and
give
give
give
and
give
some
more.
Here
is
James
talking
about
the
joke
promise
that
the
publishers
once
made
to
him
(in
his
words):
When
I
published
with
Penguin,
they
then
met
with
a
friend
of
mine
whose
book
they
wanted
to
publish.
They
didnt
know
she
was
my
friend.
She
asked
them,
What
marketing
did
you
do
for
James
Altuchers
book?
They
said,
Well,
we
got
him
a
review
in
The
Financial
Times,
a
segment
about
his
book
on
CNBC,
and
an
excerpt
in
thestreet.com
Heres
whats
so
funny.
I
had
a
weekly
column
in
The
Financial
Times.
I
WROTE
my
own
review.
As
a
joke.
For
CNBC,
I
had
a
weekly
segment
on
CNBC.
So
naturally
I
spoke
about
my
book
during
my
regular
segment.
And
for
thestreet.com
excerpt,
I
had
just
sold
my
last
company
to
thestreet.com.
So
instead
of
doing
my
usual
article
for
them,
I
did
an
excerpt.
In
other
words,
the
publisher
did
NOTHING,
but
took
credit
for
EVERYTHING.
Ultimately,
authors
(unless
you
are
Stephen
King,
etc)
have
to
do
their
own
marketing
for
books.
The
first
question
publishers
ask,
even,
before
they
look
at
your
proposal
is,
How
big
is
your
platform?
They
want
to
know
how
you
can
market
the
book
and
if
they
can
make
money
on
just
your
own
marketing
efforts.
A
traditional
publisher
is
not
even
going
to
look
at
you
unless
you
have
your
own
platform,
which
means
a
Twitter
following,
Facebook
following
and/or
a
significant
blog
following.
But
if
you
already
can
hand-deliver
the
customers,
what
do
you
need
the
traditional
publisher
for?
Wasnt
that
supposed
to
be
what
the
publishers
would
get
for
you?
Dont
they
get
you
in
bookstores?
The
answer
is
no.
Bookstores
take
very
few
of
the
books
published
by
publishers.
And
whenever
you
see
a
book
facing
forward,
or
on
the
front
table,
or
a
staff
pick
that
means
the
publisher
usually
paid
to
have
that
special
placement.
Most
books
dont
get
this.
And
if
you
dont
get
that,
chances
are
your
books
wont
sell.
Claudia
speaking:
howd
you
like
that
story?
Which
reminds
me,
stories
are
great
whenever
they
are
told
at
the
right
time.
Otherwise,
whats
the
point,
right?
James
book
The
Forever
Portfolio
was
an
optimistic
book.
I
did
a
study
of
it
and
found
out
that
the
majority
of
the
stocks
he
listed
(one
of
them
was
Disney)
are
up
about
1000
percent
combined.
But
the
book
was
set
to
launch
on
December
of
2008,
at
the
worst
economic
moment
of
our
generation.
The
publisher
could
NOT
move
the
release
date
because
they
have
whole
corporations
to
report
to
and
deadlines
and
journals
and
publications
and
catalogues.
They
are
huge
Trojan
horses,
once
in,
they
deploy,
and
they
are
deadly.
James
book
sold
nothing.
But
it
did
make
for
a
very
cute
story.
He
autographed
a
copy
at
a
random
signing
on
a
Borders
on
34th
street,
which
is
no
longer
there,
on
one
of
the
copies
he
wrote:
I
love
you.
He
did
that
while
looking
at
his
then
7-year-old
daughter
and
as
a
joke.
But
the
book
stayed
in
the
bookstore.
And
guess
who
picked
it
up?
Yes,
me
I
love
that
story.
It
was
our
fourth
date.
I
was
floating.
What
are
the
odds
of
that?
Ill
tell
you,
the
odds
of
THAT
are
greater
than
that
you
will
make
any
money
if
you
publish
through
the
traditional
route.
If
you
self-publish
you
control
when
the
book
goes
out.
And
if
there
is
a
disaster
you
can
hold
on,
take
a
book
out,
re-publish
later,
update
without
much
fuzz.
You
own
it.
And
you
can
move,
fast,
because
you
are
no
corporation.
Self
Publishing
Professionally
is
The
New
Black
T
he
problem
with
the
major
publishing
houses
is
that
their
staff
has
been
cut
so
thin
they
are
struggling
to
just
keep
up,
and
in
so
doing
they
mistake
the
trees
for
the
forest.
They
try
hard
but
they
are
too
busy
in
an
industry
that
is
drowning
and
water
keeps
on
coming
through
more
and
more
holes.
In
being
so
hard
at
work
they
have
no
time
to
stop
for
a
minute
and
connect
with
real
writers
who
are
doing
things
differently.
Even
the
ones
who
do,
cannot
really
go
against
the
grain
because
big
changes
in
a
corporate
(publishing)
setting
is
very
hard,
it
requires
meetings,
discussions,
project
management,
charts,
focus
groups,
or
whatever
they
call
them,
and
lots
of
layers
of
management
to
make
decisions.
I
feel
that
industry
is
busy
just
surviving,
but
fighting
the
wrong
battles,
i.e.:
fighting
to
charge
more
for
e-books
in
Amazon
(a
fair
fight
as
I
dont
think
anyone
should
ever
control
prices)
but
again,
its
missing
the
point.
It
is
not
about
pricing
anymore
but
rather
about
elasticity,
about
how
flexible
you
can
be
depending
on
what
change
is
coming
your
way.
It
is
about
working
with
an
author
and
helping
her
or
him
through
all
the
decisions
that
need
to
be
made.
In
reading
this
you
have
the
whole
world
open
to
you,
and
it
has
rolled
the
red
carpet.
As
you
read
you
will
notice
the
wealth
of
opportunities
to
write
well,
have
a
nice
design,
and
propagate
your
book
in
a
way
that
reaches
the
reader,
which
is
what
this
is
all
about.
The
interviews
at
the
end
of
the
book
are
worth
more
than
the
book
will
ever
sell
for.
You
have
authors
that
are
making
a
living
from
writing
and
they
tell
you
how
they
do
it.
There really isnt an excuse any longer to not have a book out.
Here is wishing you success with your own, professionally self-published work.
W HY
Y OU
S HOULD
S ELF
P UBLISH
I
believe
everyone
reading
this
has
the
content
inside
of
them
to
write
a
book.
If
you
want
to
stand
out
in
a
world
of
content,
you
need
to
underline
your
expertise.
Publishing
a
book
is
not
just
putting
your
thoughts
on
a
blog
post.
Its
an
event.
It
shows
your
best-curated
thoughts
and
it
shows
customers,
clients,
investors,
friends
and
lovers
what
the
most
important
things
on
your
mind
are
right
now.
Unfortunately,
most
people
suck
at
it.
Ive
largely
sucked
at
it.
Ive
published
11
books
five
with
traditional
publishers
and
six
that
are
self-published.
Claudia
talked
about
money
in
the
introduction
but
there
is
more
to
professionally
self-
publishing
a
book
than
a
dollar
sign.
For
example:
I
really
hope
that
everyone
self-publishes.
The
benefits
are
enormous
because
of
some
simple
points,
like:
A.
Control
over
design.
Traditional
publishers
usually
keep
that
control
and
they
do
a
decent
job,
however,
now
for
less
than
300
dollars
you
can
hire
thirty
designers
to
compete
for
your
business
at
99designs.com.
And
the
covers
are
good.
We
just
had
a
competition
for
the
cover
of
this
book,
what
do
you
think?
Bet
you
cant
tell
that
is
self-
published.
And
I
got
my
pick
of
over
60
covers.
B.
Content
control.
My
bet
is
close
to
100
percent
of
the
people
reading
this
have
quality
content
in
them
that
is
strong
enough
for
a
book.
But,
22-year-old
interns
at
publishing
companies
wont
recognize
that
content.
Even
the
editors,
the
publishers,
the
marketing
guys
most
of
them
will
not
recognize
the
message
you
have
to
offer.
To
give
you
an
example,
I
am
now
getting
help
from
an
editor
from
one
of
the
big
publishing
houses
for
another
book
project
and
even
though
I
said
I
only
wanted
line
by
line
editing,
this
editor
started
making
structural
changes.
Thing
is,
you
are
the
one
that
is
familiar
with
your
content
and
only
you
can
make
magic
with
it.
Suggestions
are
always
good
but
when
a
publishing
house
is
behind
an
editor,
disasters
can
happen.
If
you
dont
believe
me
you
can
check
a
book
I
wrote
with
a
ghost
editor
a
few
years
ago
which
I
wish
would
vanish
into
the
archives
of
hell,
it
is
called
The
Wall
Street
Guide
To
Guide
To
Investing
in
The
Apocalypse.
Dont
read
it,
I
will
tell
you,
it
is
not
my
book.
What
that
book
says
is
mostly
not
what
I
wanted
to
have
in
it.
Which leads me to
C.
Avoiding
bad
things
in
life.
I
hate
getting
that
feeling
of,
I
hope
he
or
she
chooses
me
for
X.
Where
X
could
be
love,
or
an
investment,
an
acquisition,
publishing
a
book,
buying
my
product,
whatever.
I
try
to
limit
this
feeling
in
my
life
whenever
possible.
I
HATE
when
I
have
to
depend
on
other
people
choosing
me.
When
you
have
to
deal
with
more
and
more
layers
of
people
who
have
to
choose
you,
you
dont
get
the
opportunity
to
choose
yourself
(!),
which
is
infinitely
more
valuable.
W HAT
I S
Y OUR
G OAL
W ITH
T HE
B OOK ?
Y
ou
may
think
this
is
not
important,
but
it
is.
Matter
of
fact,
it
is
the
first
step,
and
you
should
have
a
notebook
or
a
waiters
pad
nearby
because
ideas
will
start
to
spark
and
you
better
keep
them
somewhere.
If
you
dont
get
clear
on
what
the
objective
is
you
are
much
more
likely
to
make
mistakes
along
the
way.
If
youve
just
given
someone
your
business
card
then
you
failed.
If
you
have
a
business
card
you
might
be
about
to
fail.
Nobody
cares
whats
on
it.
I
throw
out
all
business
cards.
You
need
to
self-publish
if
you
are
in
business,
a
blogger,
a
writer,
or
in
any
profession
(essentially
all
professions)
where
you
want
to
stand
out
versus
the
competition.
There
is
one
window,
right
now,
where
you
have
the
right
combination
of
easy
to
do,
cheap,
and
nobody
is
doing
it.
The
key
is
the
Era
of
Validation
is
over.
Nobody
needs
to
pick
you.
You
choose
yourself.
If
you,
the
entrepreneur,
artist,
consultant,
yoga
teacher,
traveller,
inventor,
chemist,
retiree
with
nothing
to
do
who
found
out
a
way
to
make
money
on
the
side,
self-publish
a
book
you
will
stand
out,
you
will
make
more
money,
you
will
kick
your
competitors
right
in
the
XX,
and
you
will
look
amazingly
cool
at
cocktail
parties.
I
know
this
because
I
am
seldom
cool
but
at
cocktail
parties,
with
my
very
own
comic
book,
I
can
basically
have
sex
with
anyone
in
the
room.
But
dont
believe
me-
it
costs
you
nothing
and
almost
no
time
to
try
it
yourself.
Not
only
that
but
determining
that
your
book
will
be
your
opening
line,
your
hello,
or
your
business
card,
means
that
you
know
how
to
market
it.
If
you
want
a
book
to
have
you
be
known
then
pricing
is
not
the
priority,
what
you
want
is
high
distribution,
so
you
will
want
it
in
all
the
selling
stores
like
Amazon
and
Barnes
and
Nobles
and
Indigo,
but
you
will
also
want
it
in
PDF
and
make
deals
with
others
who
have
audiences
to
give
it
away
for
free.
You
also
know
you
want
people
to
actually
read
the
book.
Take
for
example
Choose
Yourself.
When
I
finally
became
clear
that
I
wanted
Choose
Yourself
to
be
widely
read
(rather
than
a
best
seller
or
a
credential)
the
way
to
market
it
became
very
clear,
I
knew
what
to
do.
Claudia
didnt
agree.
This
is
comes
from
an
email
she
sent
to
her
newsletter
about,
she
titled
it:
James
said:
"I
don't
care
if
I
make
money
on
this
book
or
even
lose
money
on
it.
I
want
people
to
get
the
message.
I
want
to
pay
people
back
who
buy
my
book
and
can
prove
to
me
they
read
it."
I said, "Are you crazy? Why did you even think of this."
He said, "Well, to be honest, Tucker Max was the first one to suggest it."
I said, "You mean the guy who wrote, 'Assholes Finish First'."
Although I've since met Tucker. He's a great person and incredibly intelligent.
"But
listen,"
James
said,
"We
know
that
if
people
get
something
for
free
they
won't
value
it.
And
we
also
know
that
if
someone
buys
a
book,
chances
are
they
won't
read
it."
"Ok..?" I said.
"So
I
know
the
ideas
in
this
book
helped
me.
Saved
me.
Even
freed
me
from
the
chains.
I
tell
my
story.
I
tell
other
stories.
I
give
the
methods.
I
WANT
people
to
read
this.
I
don't
care
if
I
make
money
on
it."
"I'm
not
paying
people
to
buy
the
book,"
he
said,
"I
just
want
people
to
prove
to
me
they
got
the
message
from
the
book.
Then
I'm
happy.
Then
I
will
pay
them
back
because
that
is
more
important
to
me
than
the
money.
And
if
they
don't
want
the
money,
we
can
send
it
to
our
usual
charity."
The
article
went
out
in
spite
of
her
fears,
but
you
get
the
point,
she
was
terrified
that
everyone
would
ask
for
their
money
back
and
we
would
have
to
mail
hundreds
of
thousands
of
checks
and
it
would
be
an
accounting
nightmare.
And
maybe
you
feel
that
it
could
be
gimmicky,
but
it
was
not.
How
do
I
know?
Because
of
the
numbers.
Guess
how
many
people
asked
for
their
money
back?
One
half
of
one
percent.
And
the
book
went
on
to
sell
over
200,000
copies
because
people
read
it,
and
they
bought
it
for
their
friends.
I
don't
need
to
make
a
dime
off
of
this
book.
The
ideas
in
the
book
have
already
made
me
wealthy
in
many
ways.
What
I
really
care
about
is
that
as
many
people
as
possible
read
this
book
and
understand
this
message,
even
if
it
puts
my
own
personal
investment
at
risk.
Here's
how
I'm
going
to
try
and
create
a
situation
where
as
many
people
as
possible
get
this
message:
I
know
nobody
values
booksor
anythingthat
are
given
away
for
free.
So,
Im
not
going
to
do
that.
This
isn't
one
of
those
ineffectual
self-help
books
designed
to
look
good
on
your
shelf.
You
either
read
the
book
and
use
these
ideas,
or
you
shouldn't
bother.
Thats
why
you
have
to
front
the
purchase
price.
But,
if
you
can
prove
to
me
that
you
have
actually
read
the
book,
I
will
give
you
your
money
back.
It's
an
investment
that's
all
upside
on
your
part.
Within
the
first
three
months
of
the
official
publication
date,
do
these
two
things:
If
you
can
think
of
other
ways,
that's
fine
too.
The
point
is:
prove
to
me
you
read
the
book,
and
get
your
money
back.
Or,
you
can
tell
me
to
give
it
to
a
charity.
This
is
the
charity
I
will
give
it
to:
WomenForWomen
International
I'm
a
man
of
my
word.
If
every
single
person
who
buys
the
book
takes
advantage
of
this
opportunity,
then
I
will
lose
money
on
it
(since
Amazon
takes
their
cut).
But
I'll
be
just
as
happy
because
it
means
the
message
will
spread
and
you,
the
people
who
read
the
book,
will
be
helped.
I chose myself.
Knowing
that
your
book
is
for
wide
readership
gives
you
more
choices.
You
can
give
extra
chapters
as
exclusives
(with
your
best
material)
and
then
offer
the
book
for
free
and
have
the
audience
tell
you
something,
or
give
you
something
for
a
reward
(money
back
or
something
else)
You can just have the book offered to anyone who signs up for your newsletter
You
can
use
this
as
an
opportunity
to
exercise
your
idea
muscle
and
come
up
with
ten
ideas
to
have
people
actually
read
your
book.
If
you
already
have
a
readership,
you
may
want
to
get
extra
recognition.
Then
any
of
the
lists,
like
the
NY
Times
or
the
Wall
Street
Journal
or
USA
Today
can
help
you,
because
once
you
hit
one
of
those
lists
then
you
can
attach
the
title
of
bestseller
to
your
name
wherever
you
go.
There
is
a
hierarchy
that
gives
meaning
to
the
best-seller
list
effect,
but
like
all
hierarchies,
its
going
away.
Vanishing.
Fast.
Nevertheless,
for
now,
there
are
3
lists
you
can
hit
are
these:
You
only
need
to
sell
about
2500
copies
of
your
book
in
any
given
week
to
hit
this
list.
BUT
it
has
to
be
spread
over
certain
bookstores
around
the
country
and
nobody
ever
knows
what
those
bookstores
are
(think
secret
sauce).
Also,
they
DO
NOT
count
e-books.
Also,
their
way
of
calculating
what
makes
a
best-seller
changes
all
the
time.
Listen
to
Episode
105
of
Ask
Altucher
or
read
the
transcript
here
as
Michael
explains
how
he
has
managed
to,
for
a
fee,
put
every
one
of
the
books
he
worked
on
within
the
list.
So,
yes,
you
can
BUY
YOUR
WAY
into
the
NY
Times
Best
Seller
List
but
it
is
not
cheap
(north
of
40,000
dollars
plus
buying
the
books
in
bulk),
and
it
definitely
will
not
work
if
you
dont
already
have
an
audience
that
will
pre-order
books.
By
the
way,
there
is
nothing
wrong
with
buying
your
way
into
a
prestigious
list,
by
all
means,
go
ahead
and
choose
yourself
to
do
whatever
it
is
you
want
to
do.
Having
a
NY
Times
Best
Seller
hit
does
still
(my
guess
is
not
for
much
longer)
get
you
credibility,
speaking
gigs,
and
maybe
advances
for
future
books
from
major
publishing
houses,
although
those
advances
are
going
down
really
fast.
Here
are
my
advances
on
my
first
mainstream-published
five
books
in
order:
$5,000,
$7500,
$30,000,
$100,000,
and
$30,000.
Advances
are
coming
down
quickly,
since
as
you
read
in
the
intro,
the
advance
for
Power
of
No
was
$15,000
for
two
authors.
Whichever
way
you
look
at
it
the
trend
is
down.
Publishing
Houses
also
take
advantage
of
the
paying
to
hit
the
NY
Times
list
in
a
different
way,
i.e.:
they
can
pay
to
get
a
book
on
that
first
table
you
see
on
those
still
standing
bookstores.
It
is
never
a
coincidence
that
they
are
there,
that
is
why
we
are
all
more
likely
to
buy
them.
Someone
paid
good
money
for
you
to
see
this
book
right
away.
Good
luck
getting
a
publisher
to
do
that
for
you
if
you
are
not
Stephen
King
or
your
book
is
not
called
Lean
In,
or
This
Town.
With
Power
of
No
we
got
to
be
on
a
table
close
to
the
front
at
the
Barnes
and
Nobles
on
Union
Square
in
NYC
for
about
a
week.
Then
the
book
moved
to
the
self-help
section
with
only
the
spine
showing
(rather
than
the
cover).
Claudia
asked
people
to
take
pictures
of
the
book
and
around
the
country.
We
got
photos
from
California,
Florida
and
even
some
bookstores
in
Canada,
but
it
was
not
long
until
the
book
was
not
face
forward
anymore.
The
reason
why
is
because
it
costs
publishers
too
much
money.
If
you
get
into
any
of
these
two
lists
you
become
what
is
known
in
the
industry
as
a
NATIONAL
BEST-SELLER.
That
is
what
Choose
Yourself
is
because
it
hit
the
WSJ
best-
seller
list
(on
top
of
being
a
#1
in
Amazon
see
next
point).
I
find
the
WSJ
and
USA
Today
lists
to
be
a
bit
closer
to
reality
at
least
when
it
comes
to
e-
books.
They
are
less
curated
and
they
just
go
by
the
raw
data.
They
are
also
not
afraid
to
count
Amazon
books
sales
as
they
are,
without
inserting
some
formula.
That
is
why
any
book
that
is
promoted
through
a
major
email
list
at
a
discount
($0.99
cents)
can
get
into
the
WSJ
list
by
selling,
say,
3000
copies
in
a
week.
This
is
by
far
my
favorite
list
and
I
have
a
feeling
it
will
be
the
favorite
of
everyone
pretty
soon.
Why?
Because
its
real.
Yes
I
know,
Barnes
and
Nobles
does
count
too,
but
really,
lets
be
honest,
Amazon
is
where
things
are
happening.
If
you
are
in
the
top
100
most
sold
books
on
Amazon
you
are
a
best
seller,
you
are
making
money
and
10
to
15
countries
are
ringing
your
foreign
rights
agent
phone
off
the
hook
(see
foreign
rights
later).
Thing with Amazon is you need to clarify what type of best seller you are.
Are
you
in
the
top
100
best
sellers
for
the
whole
world?
(Meaning
top
100
of
ALL
books?)
If
you
are
congratulations!
It
means
they
will
rank
you
as
an
author
too.
It
is
fascinating.
It
is
also
VERY
HARD.
At
its
peak
James
book
hit
#13,
that
is
in
the
whole
world!
Which,
for
a
NON-Fiction
book,
is
almost
impossible.
The
top
best
sellers
are
usually
in
the
categories
of
paranormal
or
romance
novels.
Non-fiction
is
a
hard
sell!
When
Choose
Yourself
was
#13
in
the
world,
it
was
also
#1
for
Non-Fiction
books.
BUT
that
is
a
sub-category.
Within
non-fiction
it
was
king,
followed
by
the
likes
of
the
then
recently
released
Lean
In.
So
the
thing
to
know
about
Amazon
is
that
being
#1
in
your
category
is
great,
but
not
exactly
a
total
best
seller.
When
Claudias
self-published
book
was
first
in
Amazon
in
May
of
2011,
it
hit
#1
but
for
the
category
of
YOGA.
Nevertheless
it
was
a
best
seller
among
people
reading
yoga
books,
and
that
is
not
a
bad
thing.
So
whenever
someone
says
they
have
a
#1
best
seller
in
Amazon,
it
begs
the
question:
was
it
in
a
category
or
was
it
for
all
books?
If
you
do
ask
that
question
do
it
nicely.
Authors
are
very
sensitive
people.
Once a Best-Seller
Claudia
was
asked
to
give
a
talk
about
self-publishing
because
she
knows
a
lot
about
the
industry
by
now.
She
is
the
editor
in
chief
and
head
producer
for
all
of
my
books.
The
woman
who
was
facilitating
the
talk
called
it:
Get
a
behind-the-scenes
process
of
how
James
&
Claudia
self-published
his
#1
NYT
Best
Seller
book
Choose
Yourself
The
book
is
a
WSJ
and
an
Amazon
bestseller,
it
is
not
a
#1
NY
Times
Best
Seller,
but
IT
DOES
NOT
MATTER.
If
you
hit
a
list,
ANY
list,
it
will
be
good
for
the
book.
Not
everyone
knows
what
the
differences
are.
Now
you
do.
You
also
need
to
become
very
clear
on
what
your
order
of
priorities
is,
else
every
step
of
the
way
you
will
not
have
a
clear
guiding
point
of
reference.
I
asked
Joe
Ragan
if
he
gets
jealous.
His
wife,
Theresa,
writes
romance
novels.
She
also
writes
thrillers
under
the
name,
TR
Ragan.
Shes
sold
300,000
copies
of
her
books
as
of
2012.
She
is
entirely
self-published
through
Amazon/Createspace.
Why
would
I
get
jealous?
he
said
and
he
was
smiling
so
I
knew
he
was
up
for
the
question.
Lets
say
Theresa
writes
about
a
love
interest
in
one
of
her
books.
Lets
say
her
main
character
is
clearly
based
on
her
but
the
love
interest
is
not
like
you
in
any
way.
Do
you
get
jealous
of
the
love
interest
in
her
book?
I
was
asking
because
I
knew
if
Claudia
was
a
romance
novelist
and
wrote
about
a
love
interest
that
was
nothing
like
me
I
would
certainly
get
jealous.
No
matter
how
much
self-work
I
did
I
would
get
jealous.
I
hate
having
that
mental
illness.
Joe
laughed.
We
were
at
a
dinner
that
Amazon
organized
for
a
few
authors
who
had
used
Createspace
for
self-publishing,
my
latest
self-published
book
at
the
time
was
I
Was
Bling
But
Now
I
See.
Theresa
had
burst
out
a
quick
seven
novels
on
that
platform.
Two
thrillers
and
five
romance
novels.
Whitney,
from
Amazon,
laughed
and
said,
Thats
a
good
question.
She
wanted
to
know
also.
I
never
get
jealous,
Joe
said.
And
then
I
was
jealous
of
him.
Im
stuck
in
my
brain
when
it
comes
to
issues
like
this.
Thank
god
Claudia
is
not
a
romance
novelist.
But
then
Theresa
piped
in,
I
always
make
sure
the
love
interest
has
some
aspects
that
are
like
Joe.
Maybe
a
food
he
likes
to
eat,
or
clothing
he
likes
to
wear.
Something.
See.
A
good
romance
novelist
knows
how
to
keep
her
man
happy.
I
spoke
more
with
Theresa
the
next
time
we
met,
at
the
Amazon
booth
at
the
book
expo
where
we
were
both
signing
books.
Now
I
had
an
opportunity
to
be
jealous
of
her.
Since
she
started
self-publishing
in
March,
2011
she
has
sold
300,000
books.
300,000!
And
now
she
had
just
signed
a
deal
with
Thomas
&
Mercer,
which
is
Amazons
publishing
company
that
competes
with
the
more
traditional
publishers.
But
Im
still
going
to
be
using
Createspace
and
Kindle
Direct
for
self-publishing,
she
said.
She
told
me
she
had
been
writing
and
trying
to
get
published
for
19
years.
She
had
been
rejected
by
every
publisher.
She
had
had
two
agents
but
they
hadnt
helped
her.
She
wrote
every
day
(1000
to
3000
words
every
day.
If
I
get
1000
words
done
in
the
morning
I
can
feel
happy
for
the
rest
of
the
day
knowing
I
did
it)
she
had
been
in
writing
groups,
she
had
tried
everything
to
get
published.
I
asked
her
if
she
outlined
everything
before
she
wrote.
No,
she
said,
I
just
make
sure
I
do
those
1000-3000
words
a
day.
Over the course of those 19 years Ive received over 100 rejections, she said.
This
is
why
I
dont
like
traditional
publishers.
Think
about
it.
Some
22
year
old,
fresh
out
of
college
editorial
associate
rejected
her
books.
Now,
in
just
the
past
year,
she
has
sold
300,000
copies.
That
would
put
her
on
any
bestseller
list
in
the
world.
Clearly
the
readers
have
spoken!
Shes
a
success!
For
19
years
the
traditional
publishers
were
wrong.
Her
first
book
came
out
in
March,
2011.
Her
second
in
April,
2011.
With
self-publishing
you
have
to
be
prolific.
But
with
3000
words
a
day
thats
possible.
She
told
me,
At
first
I
was
selling
hundreds
of
copies,
then
thousands,
then
one
site,
A
Pixel
of
Ink
mentioned
my
book
and
things
really
took
off.
So
after
19
years
of
being
rejected
by
traditional
publishers,
she
CHOSE
HERSELF
and
is
now
making
a
great
living.
Because
of
technology,
and
the
total
breaking
down
of
societal,
financial,
and
psychological
barriers
brought
on
by
the
financial
catastrophe,
its
become
more
acceptable,
even
welcome,
to
choose
yourself.
You
no
longer
have
to
wait
for
the
big
media
companies
to
call
you.
You
no
longer
have
to
wait
for
the
big
companies
to
reach
down
from
the
sky
and
offer
you
a
job.
You
no
longer
have
to
wait
for
some
website
to
link
to
you
so
you
can
get
thousands
of
followers.
You
can
work
hard,
be
persistent,
and
eat
what
you
kill.
You
can
choose
yourself
to
be
the
dream
you
always
wanted
to
be.
You
build
your
platform
and
then
select
yourself
to
be
the
star
of
it.
Theresa
wanted
to
be
a
writer.
She
worked
19
years
for
it.
Nobody
would
choose
her.
So
she
uploaded
one
book,
then
two,
then
a
thriller,
then
four
more
books.
Now
she
is
sought
after.
But
its
too
late
for
anyone
to
get
her
before
she
becomes
a
success.
She
already
IS
a
success
because
she
chose
herself
to
become
one.
She
had
mentioned
something
about
emailing
reviewers
reviews
of
her
book
and
I
wasnt
sure
if
I
had
heard
right
so
I
wrote
her
and
asked
her
to
clarify.
She
wrote
back
and
we
continued
our
conversation
through
emails.
Theresa:
When
I
emailed
a
reviewer
every
day
asking
for
reviews
this
is
what
I
meant:
I
sent
an
email
to
actual
book
reviewersmostly
romance
reviewers
and
I
asked
them
if
they
were
interested
in
reviewing
one
of
my
books
if
I
sent
it
to
them.
Many
reviewers
were
interested,
so
I
would
send
them
a
digital
copy
through
kindle
or
nook
or
smashwords,
depending
on
what
sort
of
ereader
device
they
had.
Some
reviewers
took
months
to
get
the
review
done
and
many
posted
the
review
on
Amazon.
I
would
then
Tweet
or
put
the
review
on
Facebook.
This
helped
to
get
my
name
out
in
the
beginning.
The
more
reviews
on
Amazon,
the
more
sales,
more
interview
requestsmore
opportunities.
Below
are
just
two
of
many
sites
where
you
can
find
long
lists
of
reviewers.
These
are
the
types
of
people
I
would
send
an
email
asking
them
if
they
would
be
interested
in
reviewing
my
book.
I
did
this
for
the
first
three
months
in
my
self-published
journey.
So
again,
not
only
did
she
upload
her
book
to
Createspace
and
self-publish,
she
didnt
rest
there.
You
cant
just
go
back
to
your
desk
and
write
another
novel.
You
have
to
keep
choosing
yourself
in
every
medium.
Publishers
will
not
market
you.
Amazon
will
not
market
you.
If
you
dont
promote
yourself,
then
nobody
will.
So
she
used
every
social
medium.
She
emailed
all
the
reviewers
she
could
find.
She
was
polite
and
asked
them
if
they
wanted
a
book
rather
than
shoving
it
at
them.
So
it
was
bulk
asking,
Then
she
would
take
the
review
and
spread
it
across
all
media:
Facebook,
twitter,
Amazon,
etc.
And
for
each
review
she
saw
a
corresponding
increase
in
sales.
And
because
she
was
prolific,
her
backlist
would
sell
as
well.
So
all
seven
book
started
becoming
major
sellers.
But
theres
one
key
component
she
needed
in
order
to
select
herself.
I
wrote
her
again
and
asked
her
if
she
was
frustrated
during
the
19
years
she
couldnt
publish.
Here
is
her
response:
I
was
frustrated
and
in
the
middle
of
my
journey
I
was
even
feeling
a
little
bitter
about
not
selling.
In
2007,
I
read
The
Secret
and
a
book
by
Eckhart
Tolle
and
those
changed
my
life
literally.
I
also
love
your
book!
I
never
wrote
for
money,
but
I
did
want
readers.
And
I
did
want
to
see
my
book
in
bookstores.
That
was
definitely
a
motivating
factor.
Making
money
now
is
icing
on
the
cake.
Its
more
than
I
ever
imagined.
If
it
all
stops
tomorrow,
I
am
happy
and
grateful.
In
2007
I
began
to
appreciate
all
the
things
that
had
always
bothered
melike
weeds
growing
in
the
yard
and
the
fact
that
I
had
a
roof
over
my
head.
I
began
to
appreciate
my
family
and
every
single
thing
I
hadwater
to
drink,
legs
to
walk,
eyes
to
see.
Becoming
a
positive
person
has
changed
my
life.
I
started
to
see
the
world
in
a
new
way.
My
oldest
son
said
that
the
world
was
always
that
way,
but
I
was
just
seeing
everything
through
rose-
colored
glasses,
and
he
was
right.
Everything
wonderful
was
always
right
there
in
front
of
me,
I
just
wasnt
seeing
it
until
I
change
my
mind
set.
I
have
two
takeaways
from
this.
One
is
the
psychological
barrier
it
takes
to
choose
you.
First
you
have
to
love
yourself.
You
have
to
understand
that
validation
comes
from
within.
Not
when
the
big
bad
media
company
reaches
down
from
the
clouds
and
accepts
you,
like
a
parent
loving
a
baby
in
a
crib.
You
need
to
love
yourself
enough
that
the
aura
you
spread
is
noticeable
by
everyone.
That
the
love
and
validation
you
crave
comes
from
inside
first.
And
suddenly
that
validation
will
automatically
guide
your
efforts
as
you
go
through
the
process
of
selecting
yourself
for
success
in
whatever
you
endeavor.
Finally,
I
want
to
add,
I
have
now
read
Theresas
thriller,
Abducted.
I
couldnt
put
it
down.
Its
a
page-turner,
every
chapter
ends
with
a
cliffhanger,
and
now
Im
compelled
to
buy
the
sequel
and
then
whatever
comes
after
that.
She
deserves
every
success.
Can
you
make
money
writing?
Absolutely!
Read
the
transcript
of
the
James
Altucher
show
with
Hugh
Howey
and
Listen
to
Ask
Altucher
episode
120
for
more.
H OW
TO
C REATE
A
P ROFESSIONALLY
L OOKING
B OOK
T
he
first
and
most
important
step
of
self-publishing
your
masterpiece
is
actually
writing
the
book.
I
write
every
day
after
reading
and
two
hours
after
I
wake
up,
when
the
mind
is
at
its
peak
of
productivity,
and
because
of
that,
even
if
I
write
a
thousand
words
I
end
up
with
at
least
360,000
words
in
a
year.
That
is
enough
content
for
5
to
6
books.
Were
all
human.
A
computer
can
win
Jeopardy
but
still
not
write
a
novel.
If
you
want
people
to
relate
to
you,
then
you
have
to
be
human.
Penelope
Trunk
started
a
post
a
few
weeks
ago:
I
smashed
a
lamp
over
my
head.
There
was
blood
everywhere.
And
glass.
And
I
took
a
picture.
Thats
real
bleeding.
Claudia recently put up a post where the first line was painful:
On
March
31,
1986,
my
mother
jumped
out
of
the
7th
floor
window
of
her
bedroom.
On
her
way
down
she
crashed
onto
a
glass
table
in
the
backyard
of
the
owners
of
the
ground
floor
unit.
She
died
that
day.
She
was
depressed
and
desperate.
I
cried
reading
it.
The
New
York
Observer
picked
it
up.
People
wrote
to
her
and
shared
their
own
stories.
Bleeding
in
the
first
line
invites
the
reader
in,
it
sparks
curiosity
for
what
is
to
come.
A
well-crafted
first
line
also
inspires
confidence
that
the
writer
knows
what
is
doing,
and
that
it
will
carry
the
reader
through.
Write
whatever
you
want.
Then
take
out
the
first
paragraph
and
last
paragraph.
Heres
the
funny
thing
about
this
rule.
Its
sort
of
like
knowing
the
future.
You
still
cant
change
it.
In
other
words,
even
if
you
know
this
rule
and
write
the
article,
the
article
will
still
be
better
if
you
take
out
the
first
paragraph
and
the
last
paragraph.
But
dont
believe
me,
do
it
and
see
for
yourself.
Read. A lot.
You
cant
write
without
first
reading.
A
lot.
When
I
was
writing
five
bad
novels
in
a
row
I
would
read
all
day
long
whenever
I
wasnt
writing
(I
had
a
job
as
a
programmer,
which
I
would
do
for
about
five
minutes
a
day
because
my
programs
all
worked
and
I
just
had
to
maintain
them).
I
read
everything
I
could
get
my
hands
on.
Because
of
my
podcast
The
James
Altucher
show,
the
amount
of
reading
I
do
has
increased
exponentially
and
now
I
read
about
fifteen
books
per
week.
This
particular
week
I
had
no
podcasts
because
of
the
new
year
break,
that
is
why
the
amount
of
fiction
books
is
higher.
I
read
fiction
to
learn
how
to
write
well.
Any
non-
fiction
writer
could
benefit
by
reading
crafted
non-fiction
books.
Write
A
lot.
A
typical
book
is
anywhere
from
40,000-80,000
words.
So
if
you
can
average
1,000
words
a
day,
seven
days
a
week,
you
can
write
four
to
eight
books
a
year.
Or
maybe
just
one
very
good,
edited,
revised,
professional
one.
Or
10!
Knock
yourself
out!
Before
I
write
every
day
I
spend
30-60
minutes
reading
high
quality
short
stories,
poetry,
or
essays.
Books
by
Denis
Johnson,
Miranda
July,
David
Foster
Wallace,
Ariel
Leve,
William
Vollmann,
Raymond
Carver,
etc.
All
of
the
writers
are
in
the
top
1/1000
of
1%
of
writers.
It
has
to
be
at
that
level
or
else
it
wont
lift
up
your
writing
at
all.
This
is
a
must.
Writing
is
spiritual
practice.
You
are
diving
inside
of
yourself
and
cleaning
out
the
toxins.
If
you
dont
do
it
every
day,
you
lose
the
ability.
If
you
do
it
every
day,
then
slowly
you
find
out
where
all
the
toxins
are.
And
the
cleaning
can
begin.
Coffee
I
go
through
three
cups
at
least
before
I
even
begin
to
write.
No
coffee,
no
creativity.
Coffee
can
also
help
with
the
next
suggestion.
You
wont
see
that
on
any
other
list
on
how
to
be
a
better
writer.
If
your
body
doesnt
flow
then
your
brain
wont
flow.
Eat
more
fruit
if
you
have
to.
Go
to
sleep
before
9pm
at
least
4
days
a
week.
And
stretch
while
taking
deep
breaths
before
you
write.
We
supposedly
use
only
5%
of
our
brain.
You
need
to
use
6%
at
least
to
write
better
than
everyone
else.
So
make
sure
your
brain
is
getting
as
much
healthy
oxygen
as
possible.
Too
many
people
waste
valuable
writing
or
resting
time
by
chattering
until
all
hours
of
the
night.
Dont
write
if
youre
upset
at
someone.
Then
the
person
you
are
upset
at
becomes
your
audience.
You
want
to
love
and
flirt
with
your
audience
so
they
can
love
you
back.
Be Honest
Tell
people
the
stuff
they
all
think
but
nobody
ever
says.
Some
people
will
be
angry
you
let
out
the
secret.
But
most
people
will
be
grateful.
Else
you
arent
delivering
value.
Be
the
little
boy
in
the
Emperor
Wears
No
Clothes.
If
you
cant
do
this,
dont
write.
For
every
single
person
that
you
worry
about,
deduct
1%
in
quality
from
your
writing.
Everyone
has
deductions.
I
have
to
deduct
about
10%
right
off
the
top.
Maybe
there
are
10
people
Im
worried
about.
Some
of
them
are
evil
people.
Some
of
them
are
people
I
just
dont
want
to
offend.
So
my
writing
is
only
about
90%
of
what
it
could
be.
But
I
think
most
people
write
at
about
20%
of
what
it
could
be.
Believe
it
or
not,
clients,
customers,
friends,
family,
will
love
you
more
if
you
are
honest
with
them.
So
we
all
have
our
boundaries.
But
try
this:
for
the
next
ten
things
you
write,
tell
people
something
that
nobody
knows
about
you.
Be opinionated
Most
people
I
know
have
strong
opinions
about
at
least
one
or
two
things.
Write
about
those.
Nobody
cares
about
all
the
things
you
dont
have
strong
opinions
on.
Barry
Ritholz
told
me
the
other
day
he
doesnt
start
writing
until
hes
angry
about
something.
Thats
one
approach.
Barry
and
I
have
had
some
great
writing
fights
because
sometimes
weve
been
angry
at
each
other.
Take
what
everyone
thinks
and
explore
the
opposite.
Dont
disagree
just
to
disagree.
But
explore.
Turn
the
world
upside
down.
Guess
what?
There
are
people
living
in
China.
Plenty
of
times
youll
find
value
where
nobody
else
did.
I
wanted
to
a
piece:
How
I
Torture
Women
but
I
settled
for
Im
Guilty
of
Torture.
I
wimped
out.
But
I
have
some
other
fun
ones.
Like
Is
It
Bad
I
Wanted
My
First
Kid
to
Be
Aborted.
Dont
forget
that
you
are
competing
against
a
trillion
other
pieces
of
content
out
there,
as
well
as
games,
apps,
calendar
appointments,
to-do
lists,
and
TV.
So
you
need
a
title
to
draw
people
in.
Else,
you
lose.
Steal
I
dont
quite
mean
it
literally.
But
if
you
know
a
topic
gets
page
views
(and
you
arent
hurting
anyone)
than
steal
it,
no
matter
whos
written
about
it
or
how
many
times
youve
written
about
it
before.
How
I
Screwed
Yasser
Arafat
out
of
$2mm
was
able
to
nicely
piggyback
off
of
how
amazingly
popular
Yasser
Arafat
is.
If
youve
ever
been
in
love,
you
know
how
to
cry.
Bring
readers
to
that
moment
when
they
were
a
child,
and
all
of
life
was
in
front
of
them,
except
for
that
one
bittersweet
moment
when
everything
began
to
change.
If
only
that
one
moment
couldve
lasted
forever.
Please
let
me
go
back
in
time
right
now
to
that
moment.
But
now
its
gone.
Relate to people
The
past
decade
has
totally
sucked.
For
everyone.
The
country
has
been
in
post-traumatic
stress
syndrome
since
9/11
and
2008
only
made
it
worse.
Ive
gone
broke
a
few
times
during
the
decade,
had
a
divorce,
lost
friendships,
and
have
only
survived
(barely)
by
being
persistent
and
knowing
I
had
two
kids
to
take
care
of,
and
loneliness
to
fight.
Nobodys
perfect.
Were
all
trying.
Show
people
how
you
are
trying
and
struggling.
Nobody
expects
you
to
be
a
superhero.
Risk
Notice
that
almost
all
of
these
rules
are
about
where
the
boundaries
are.
Most
people
play
it
too
safe.
When
you
are
really
risking
something
and
the
reader
senses
that
(and
they
WILL
sense
it),
then
you
know
you
are
in
good
territory.
If
you
arent
risking
something,
then
Im
moving
on.
I
know
Im
on
the
right
track
if
after
I
post
something
someone
tweets,
OMFG.
Be funny
You
can
be
all
of
the
above
and
be
funny
at
the
same
time.
When
I
went
to
India
I
was
brutalized
by
my
first
few
yoga
classes
(actually
every
yoga
class).
And
I
was
intimidated
by
everyone
around
me.
They
were
like
yoga
superheroes
and
I
felt
like
a
fraud
around
them.
So
I
cried,
and
hopefully
people
laughed.
It
was
also
a
case
where
I
didnt
have
to
dig
into
my
past
but
I
had
an
experience
that
was
happening
to
me
right
then.
How
do
you
be
funny?
First
rule
of
funny:
ugly
people
are
funny.
Im
naturally
ugly
so
its
easy.
Make
yourself
as
ugly
as
possible.
Nobody
wants
to
read
that
you
are
beautiful
and
doing
great
in
life.
Your
writing
is
meaningless
unless
the
last
line
KILLS.
Read
the
book
of
short
stories
Jesus
Son
by
Denis
Johnson.
Its
the
only
way
to
learn
how
to
do
a
last
line.
The
last
line
should
take
you
all
the
way
back
to
the
first
line
and
then
BOOM!
For example, Charles Bukowski finishes a short story with: I got the hell out of there
Dennis
Johnson
ends
his
short
story
entitled
Steady
Hands
at
Seattle
General
with
this
line:
Talk
into
my
bullet
hole.
Tell
me
Im
fine
Even
on
a
tweet
or
Facebook
status
update.
Deliver
poetry
and
value
with
every
word.
Else,
be
quiet.
I
tried
an
experiment
last
week
on
crafting
a
Tweet,
it
was
right
after
the
mess
over
the
release
of
the
movie
The
Interview,
it
said:
I
have
one
criteria
now
when
I
hit
"send"
on
an
email:
am
I
comfortable
with
the
leader
of
North
Korea
reading
this
out
loud.
Forget
commas
and
semicolons.
A
period
makes
people
pause.
Your
sentences
should
be
strong
enough
that
you
want
people
to
pause
and
think
about
it.
This
will
also
make
your
sentences
shorter.
Short
sentences
are
good.
A
copy-writer
who
generated
five
million
dollars
with
one
letter
last
year
once
told
me
that
he
cared
not
for
grammar
at
all.
I
believed
him.
Youve
spent
your
whole
life
learning
how
to
communicate
with
that
voice.
Why
change
it
when
you
communicate
with
text?
Break
the
laws
of
physics
Theres
no
time
in
text.
Nothing
has
to
go
in
order.
Dont
make
it
nonsense.
But
dont
be
beholden
to
the
laws
of
physics.
KISS
Use
said
instead
of
any
other
word.
Dont
use
he
suggested
or
he
bellowed.
Just
he
said.
Well
figure
it
out
if
he
suggested
something.
Your
idea
muscle
atrophies
within
days
if
you
dont
exercise
it.
Then
what
do
you
do?
You
need
to
exercise
it
every
day
until
it
hurts.
Else
no
ideas.
See
Claudias
Become
an
Idea
Machine
for
prompts
if
you
need
them.
She
offers
180
of
them,
so
you
can
list
your
ideas
away.
If
you
are
not
coming
up
with
at
least
ten
ideas
a
day
your
idea-muscle
is
dying.
Paint.
Let it sleep
Whatever
you
are
working
on,
sleep
on
it.
Then
wake
up,
stretch,
coffee,
read,
and
look
again.
Rewrite.
Take
out
every
other
sentence.
Someone
asked
me
on
Ask
Altucher
how
to
get
the
final
stretch
of
a
project
done.
In
a
book
this
can
feel
like
hell,
I
hate
the
last
touches,
but
they
are
key,
it
is
what
makes
a
book
professional.
Clean
up
the
whole
area
around
you.
Clean
up
the
table,
clean
up
the
entire
room.
This
will
give
you
the
feeling
of
a
fresh
start.
Next,
list
for
yourself,
even
just
in
your
head,
why
finishing
this
project
will
be
good
for
other
people.
Remembering
why
you
started
this
project
will
help
you
finish
it.
Lastly,
picture
in
your
mind
what
it
will
feel
like
when
it's
finally
finished.
You
can
listen
to
episode
168
on
Ask
Altucher
to
feel
the
inspiration.
B
efore
I
decided
to
really
get
serious
about
self-publishing,
my
editing
was
just
a
spell
check
(which
was
actually
more
than
some
of
my
mainstream
publishers
did.)
Claudia
asked
me
if
I
was
kidding
on
this.
But
I
told
her
to
read
my
second
book
and
she
stopped
questioning
it.
In
other
words,
it
was
awful.
With
Choose
Yourself
I
went
all
out.
I
hired
two
copy
editors
to
go
through
the
basics
on
spelling
and
grammar.
Then
I
hired
a
company
run
by
Nils
Parker
to
help
me
structurally
edit,
i.e.
do
the
job
that
editors
used
to
do
(example:
Maxwell
Perkins
in
the
1930s)
but
have
been
sorely
lacking
in
the
past
20
years
from
traditional
publishers.
Nils
has
previously
edited
bestsellers
from
Tucker
Max,
Kamal
Ravikant,
Ryan
Holiday,
and
a
dozen
writers,
as
well
as
written
screenplays,
books,
etc.
I
am
not
saying,
hire
Nils
by
the
way.
He
is
expensive
now.
Im
just
saying
this
is
who
I
used
(and
paid).
Make
sure
whom
you
use
is
among
the
best
in
the
world,
or
else
you
arent
taking
advantage
of
what
the
self-publishing
world
has
to
offer.
Nils
and
I
went
back
and
forth
on
more
than
15
different
rewrites
for
my
book.
The
difference
between
the
original
version
and
the
final
version
is
like
the
difference
between
chicken
shit
and
chicken
salad.
And
yes,
publishers
have
editors.
But
I
specifically
wanted
to
choose
my
own
editor
and
use
an
editor
that
has
worked
on
books
that
have
sold
millions
of
copies.
The
entire
idea
of
self-publishing
era
is
that
I
am
not
limited
to
who
is
on
the
publishers
staff
but
I
can
pick
the
absolute
best
people
in
the
industry.
With
millions
of
books
out
there,
the
competition
is
incredible.
My
friend
Jayson
Gaynyard
recently
did
something
creative,
he
asked
his
audience
to
power
read
his
book
before
his
release
and
give
him
suggestions.
There
are
many
ways
in
which
you
can
get
collaboration
other
than
editing.
Regardless
of
the
method
you
choose,
an
extra
set
of
eyes
is
always
a
good
idea;
just
make
sure
those
eyes
have
glasses.
Denial
is
the
last
thing
you
want
in
a
professional
book.
D ESIGN
I
never
liked
any
of
the
designs
on
my
traditionally
published
books,
but
I
had
no
control
over
them.
I
dont
mean
this
to
sound
so
anti-publisher.
But
they
were
busier
with
bigger
authors,
and
I
dont
think
they
were
always
able
to
devote
resources
to
me.
So,
when
I
made
sure
I
put
out
a
product
I
could
be
proud
of,
I
used
Erin
Tyler
Design
who
helped
me
find
the
right
cover
designer,
and
she
also
managed
the
interior
design
process,
which
was
a
lot
trickier
than
I
thought.
There
is
also
99designs
or
Fiverr.
Finding
a
designer
is
now
just
a
Google
away.
Do
not
cheap
out
on
this
because
the
way
the
book
looks
is
the
first
thing
your
reader
will
see.
For
this
cover
the
winner
was
selected
after
running
a
contest
on
99designs
and
looking
through
50
different
covers.
T ITLE
I
had
total
control
over
the
title.
My
first
choice
for
Choose
Yourself
was
The
Choose
Yourself
Era.
But
whenever
anyone
asked
me
to
say
the
title
I
had
trouble
saying
it.
Era
sounds
like
Error.
One
person
asked
me
if
it
was
going
to
a
book
about
archaeology.
So
somehow
it
wasnt
working.
So
I
picked
10
titles
that
I
liked,
combined
them
with
the
cover
and
created
Facebook
ads
that
I
sent
out
to
all
my
friends
and
friends
of
friends
in
the
U.S.
Then
I
sat
back
and
watched
the
click-troughs.
After
a
few
days
and
thousands
of
click-troughs
I
had
my
title.
The
Choose
Yourself
Era
came
in
a
distant
third
place.
Pick
Yourself!
was
right
above
it
in
second
place.
And
Choose
Yourself!
came
in
first
by
far.
I
then
took
the
same
Facebook
approach
to
pick
the
subtitle
and
the
final
version
of
the
cover
design.
I
was
at
an
Amazon
dinner
once.
One
guy
who
was
making
a
solid
living
self-
publishing
science
fiction
novels
told
me
that
he
always
made
an
audiobook.
I
thought
that
was
a
horrible
idea,
and
told
him
so.
But
two
things
about
audiobooks:
He
said,
When
people
see
you
have
an
audiobook,
they
see
your
book
as
even
more
credible.
It
stands
out
from
the
average
self-published
book
when
you
have
an
e-book,
a
print
version,
and
an
audiobook.
Plus,
the
audio
book
is
more
expensive,
so
even
though
there
are
fewer
sales,
its
decent
money.
By
the
way,
if
you
self-publish,
always
do
a
print
book
at
the
very
least.
Even
if
99
percent
of
your
sales
are
going
to
be
e-book.
I
asked
the
head
of
an
ad
agency
what
marketing
tips
he
had
for
my
upcoming
book.
He
said,
first
thing,
Make
an
audiobook.
For
your
kind
of
book,
people
will
love
listening
to
it
while
they
drive
into
work.
So
Claudia,
my
wife
who
has
been
supportive
of
every
aspect
of
this
effort,
set
up
her
office
in
our
house
to
be
a
mini-recording
studio.
I
wrote
to
Tucker
Max
that
I
was
going
to
make
an
audiobook.
He
wrote
back:
James,
where
are
you
doing
the
audio,
and
whos
editing
it?
Please
tell
me
you
arent
just
doing
it
yourself
with
your
Mac
and
a
mic
you
bought
online.
We
looked
at
our
Mac
and
a
mic
that
we
had
just
bought
online
and
decided
to
go
to
a
professional
studio.
Tucker
suggested
John
Marshall
Media.
They
had
done
audiobooks
ranging
from
President
Clintons
autobiography
to
the
Harry
Potter
books
to
Freakonomics.
It
was
a
thoroughly
annoying
experience
but
it
was
worth
it.
I
felt
uncomfortable
just
sitting
there
for
eight
hours
reading
words
I
had
written.
For
one
thing,
it
hurt.
Reading
for
eight
straight
hours
was
killing
my
throat.
Second,
I
didnt
want
to
just
read
stories
I
had
already
written.
So
I
did
it
totally
unabridged
and
improvised
quite
a
bit,
making
it
somewhat
original
compared
to
the
book.
But
the
best
reason
for
doing
the
audiobook
is
it
forces
you
to
really
look
at
your
writing
and
hear
what
works
and
what
doesnt.
I
rewrote
about
20
percent
of
the
book
after
reading
things
that
didnt
quite
sound
right
out
loud.
It
meant
another
round
of
edits
to
improve
the
book,
a
process
I
never
would
have
gone
through
if
I
hadnt
done
the
audio
version.
Uploading a book is easy once you have the professional files done.
You
will
however,
need
to
have
the
book
first
as
a
kindle
or
as
a
soft
cover,
or
both,
otherwise
ACX
may
not
let
you
just
upload
audio.
Once your book is on Amazon it is easy to link and upload the files.
Make
sure
to
get
a
five
minute
audio
file
that
you
will
use
as
a
sample
so
people
browsing
can
click
Listen
when
making
up
their
minds
on
whether
to
buy
the
audio
or
the
kindle
or
the
paper
back.
F OREWORD /I NTRODUCTION
W
homever
you
choose
to
be
your
introduction
and
foreword
can
be
listed
as
such
in
Amazon.
This
means
that
if
someone
is
searching,
say
for
Stephen
King,
and
you
were
smart
enough
to
get
him
to
write
your
foreword,
your
book
will
show
up
among
his
work.
This
is
why
people
will
be
hesitant
to
write
an
intro
or
a
forward
to
your
book.
However,
if
you
get
someone
famous
to
do
it
you
get
an
advantage.
This
is
why
I
worked
so
hard
at
courting
Dick
Costolo,
the
CEO
of
Twitter,
to
write
the
forward
for
Choose
Yourself.
I
wanted
the
book
to
spread,
and
having
a
sign
of
credibility
such
as
the
CEO
of
a
major
company
helped
it.
B LURBS
T
he
beauty
of
blurbs
is
that
they
are
easy.
You
can
ask
people
you
like
and
offer
them
suggestions
so
they
do
not
have
to
read
the
whole
book.
I
say
this
because
usually
you
will
be
asking
writers
for
blurbs,
and
writers
write
and
they
are
busy,
I
know
I
am.
So
whenever
you
ask
for
a
blurb
be
pro-active.
In
the
checklist
I
wrote
that
you
need
to
ask
for
three.
This
is
a
minimum
number,
because
less
than
three
means
you
are
not
really
professional.
If
you
only
have
two
it
looks
like
you
begged
for
it,
but
if
you
have
three
it
seems
you
had
to
choose
from
among
so
many.
Dont
ask
me
why
this
is,
maybe
is
just
my
opinion,
I
like
three.
T ESTIMONIALS
T
estimonials
sell.
Even
though
people
think
that
they
need
to
have
them
just
on
the
website,
testimonials
are
a
great
thing
for
people
to
see
when
they
open
the
look
inside
portion
that
Amazon
displays.
What
testimonials
do
is
give
social
proof
that
your
message
works.
But
you
need
to
do
them
right.
If
you
can
get
a
name,
last
name
and
location
of
the
person,
do
that.
But
that
is
the
minimum.
If
you
can
tell
their
web-site
and
even
put
a
photo
of
them
that
is
even
better.
Of
course
photos
are
not
good
within
a
book
because
they
make
files
heavier
and
you
have
to
deal
with
good
quality
and
on
and
on,
so
you
may
want
to
save
those
for
the
website,
but
when
you
are
collecting
them,
think
of
everything,
not
just
the
first
name
but
their
page,
image,
and
anything
that
can
further
add
solidity
to
their
claim
that
your
message
or
product
works.
If you open Tony Robbins book: Money, the first line, of the whole book, says:
And then it says: Bill Clinton, Former President of the United States.
Paul
Tudor
Jones
II,
Kyle
Bass,
and
among
others,
Steve
Forbes,
T.
Boons
Pickens,
Serena
Williams,
Oprah
Winfrey,
and
on
and
on.
On
the
Look
Inside
(in
Amazon)
all
I
see
is
TWENTY
SIX
testimonials.
Do
you
need
more?
Are
you
sold?
And
you
have
not
even
read
what
they
wrote,
you
just
see
the
names.
In
the
Choose
Yourself
Guide
To
Wealth
I
have
testimonials
of
famous
people
and
of
people
who
are
not
famous
(yet)
but
who
used
the
daily
practice
and
the
idea
machine
and
other
principles
described
in
Choose
Yourself
and
literally
transformed
their
lives.
You
and
I
may
not
be
Tony
Robbins
but
we
definitely
can
get
some
testimonials
and
you
should,
because
they
work.
P ROFESSIONAL
B IO
Let
me
give
you
an
example
of
what
it
means
to
have
a
professional
bio
vs.
an
amateur
life
story.
When
I
was
getting
ready
to
publish
Choose
Yourself,
I
was
getting
a
lot
of
help
from
Tucker
Max,
who
now
owns
a
company
called
Book
In
A
Box
(bookinabox.com).
Note
that
I
am
not
promoting
Tuckers
company
I
am
just
using
the
example
because
it
makes
it
very
clear
what
a
professional
bio
would
look
like.
He HATED it.
If
your
first
reaction
to
that
is
that
its
not
self-promotional
enough,then
its
probably
right.
If
I'm
leaving
out
facts,
then
insert
them.
But
that
bio
says
to
me,
"Damn,
this
dude
has
some
done
so
much
crazy
shit
in
his
life,
he
just
expects
me
to
know
the
details.
He
MUST
be
big
time."
Don't
believe
me?
Go
pull
some
books
down
off
your
shelf.
Look
at
the
bios,
and
then
think
about
what
you
know
about
the
authors.
Claudia
was
a
bit
shaken
when
we
read
that,
but
we
believed
him,
and
it
worked.
So,
to
reinforce
the
points,
your
bio
needs
to
be:
Non-promotional
Show accomplishments
Fact oriented
Result oriented
Y
ou
can
take
a
photo
yourself.
Claudia
is
very
good
at
this
and
she
always
does
it,
but
she
has
at
least
a
thousand
hours
of
doing
photography
and
video
because
of
her
yoga
teaching.
If
you
have
no
clue
get
a
professional
to
take
your
shot.
There
is
nothing
worse
than
a
photo
in
which
you
have
bad
posture,
or
you
dont
have
a
look
that
says
something
along
the
lines
of
what
your
book
is
about.
For
example,
Ryan
Holliday
has
an
interesting
photo
for
his
book
Trust
Me
Im
Lying
it
is
a
headshot
of
him
covering
his
face
with
his
hands.
This
shows
you
that
he
is
the
man
behind
the
scenes,
the
marketer
you
never
get
to
see
but
who
is
orchestrating
the
promotion
and
sales
of
your
books.
I
work
closely
with
Ryan
and
have
learned
from
him
that
the
photo
is
an
essential
part
of
a
professionally
self-published
book,
as
it
will
help
people
with
their
first
impression
of
both
you
and
the
message.
T HE
U LTIMATE
C HECK -L IST
B EFORE
S ELF -P UBLISHING
18. Record
the
audio
book
19. Wait
until
you
get
the
files
back
from
the
recording
studio
20. Select
a
five
minute
period
of
your
audio
to
be
used
as
the
sample
that
people
will
hear
and
tell
the
studio
to
give
you
this
file
as
well
Now
you
are
ready.
You
know
your
message
is
good.
You
are
proud
of
what
you
are
looking
at,
and
you
can
tell
in
a
short
sentence
what
the
book
is
about.
C REATE
S PACE
I
recommend
you
start
here,
at
CreateSpace.com.
You
will
need
an
account,
so
go
ahead
and
sign
up,
then
click
on
add
new
title
and
go
for
it.
It
is
very
simple;
you
need
to
fill
up
the
tittle,
the
sub-title,
the
author,
foreword
and
introduction.
The
ISBN
will
be
provided
for
you,
both
for
paper
back
and
kindle.
As
of
the
writing
of
this
book
there
is
no
way
to
create
a
hard
cover
version
of
your
work,
but
this
is
likely
to
change
in
the
near
future,
so
always
stay
tuned
to
Amazon
and
sign
up
for
their
updates.
Once
you
get
to
the
page
where
you
upload
the
cover
and
the
content,
if
you
followed
the
ultimate
checklist
from
the
previous
chapter
you
will
be
ready.
Just
upload
the
file
from
your
computer
and
you
are
done.
K INDLE
C
reateSpace
now
gives
you
the
option
to
create
the
kindle
version
right
from
their
page.
Follow
their
prompts
because
you
already
will
have
all
the
files
(if
you
followed
the
ultimate
checklist
from
last
chapter).
However
in
my
experience
it
does
not
always
work.
In
order
to
avoid
trouble
I
would
find
a
designer
that
can
convert
your
files
to
e.pub
(which
is
the
format
that
Kindle
uses).
BUT
make
sure
to
revise
the
files
before
uploading
them
because
there
will
be
differences
between
the
layout
of
the
create
space
manuscript
and
the
kindle
one.
It
is
just
in
the
nature
of
how
they
work.
Always
open
and
look
at
your
files.
Book Proof
Create
Space
will
offer
you
to
get
a
proof
of
your
book,
meaning
that
you
will
get
a
printed
paper
back
BEFORE
you
hit
publish.
You
may
be
like
me
and
get
really
impatient,
but
you
do
want
to
get
a
proof
before
you
hit
publish
onto
the
word.
This
is
your
professional
baby,
treat
it
with
care.
There
is
something
special
about
holding
a
copy
of
your
beautiful
work
of
art
in
your
hands,
and
you
can
use
it
to
promote
it
on
Facebook
and
Twitter
and
everywhere
else
to
start
creating
noise
around
it.
I
recently
published
a
book
and
got
myself
in
trouble
because
I
misspelled
a
word
in
the
sub-title.
NOTE: CREATE SPACE WONT LET YOU CHANGE A SUBTITLE ONCE YOU WRITE IT.
You will actually have to find their help page and hit the button so that they will call you.
The
original
information
on
the
book,
like
the
title,
sub-title,
author
and
forward/intro,
cannot
be
changed
once
you
upload
it.
Also,
the
day
you
upload
things,
even
if
it
is
for
the
purposes
of
getting
your
own
proof
to
look
at,
CreateSpace
will
consider
it
as
the
day
of
publishing.
So
make
sure
to
call
them
if
you
want
another
day
to
be
reflected.
Do
not
go
into
Create
Space
without
your
e-pub
files.
Get
everything
ready
before
you
start
the
process
so
you
will
not
miss
anything
and
your
book
can
come
out
professionally.
This means that you open and look at all the files.
Always
get
a
proof
file,
a
physical
proof
of
the
paper
back,
because
there
is
nothing
like
the
printed
thing
to
notice
the
mistakes
in
the
table
of
contents
or
how
you
added
a
word
here
or
there
that
should
not
be
there.
Once
everything
is
done
and
youre
satisfied
go
ahead
and
hit
publish.
See
your
baby
go
onto
the
world
and
take
on
a
life
of
its
own.
Okay.
So
you
have
written
your
book
and
self-published
it.
Now
what?
B UILD
Y OUR
P LATFORM
B
uilding
your
platform
should
actually
be
something
that
you
do
before,
during
and
after
writing
your
book.
Connecting
others,
like
for
example
people
who
like
your
work,
and
who
like
what
you
have
to
say,
and
how
you
say
it,
is
how
you
find
your
true
fan
base.
The
audience
will
not
find
you
in
todays
world
because
everyone
is
already
into
his
or
her
thing,
so
you
need
to
find
them,
or
at
least
meet
them
half
way.
My
strategy
is
to
be
everywhere,
so
whoever
may
have
not
heard
of
my
writing
will
have
a
chance
and
if
they
like
it
they
may
keep
coming
and
reading.
I
have
seen
great
books
fail
because
authors
only
begin
to
promote
their
book
once
they
are
done
writing
it.
They
spend
years
writing
the
book,
only
to
have
it
flop
on
release
because
nobody
knows
who
they
are.
Writing
and
promotion
should
go
hand
in
hand
with
each
other.
U LTIMATE
G UIDE
T O
B UILDING
Y OUR
P LATFORM
A.
Blog
Everywhere.
Have
an
honest
voice.
Dont
be
afraid
to
say
things
about
either
yourself
or
your
industry.
Provide
unique
perspective.
If
it
doesnt
bleed
it
doesnt
lead.
Make
sure
every
post
or
video
you
do
bleeds
from
the
heart,
entertains,
and
educates.
In
that
order.
But
once
you
do
it
make
sure
to
distribute
your
posts
to
all
sites
you
can.
At
the
moment
I
distribute
my
content
on
so
many
bigger
sites
that
Ive
lost
count,
but
they
include
Yahoo,
Huffington
Post,
Quora
(where
I
am
a
top
writer),
LinkedIn
(where
I
am
an
influencer),
Thought
Catalog,
New
York
Observer,
and
on
and
on
and
on.
People
need
to
find
you,
and
your
own
blog
may
no
longer
be
enough.
Make
sure
to
get
out
there
and
be
everywhere.
B.
Become
a
Quora
Top
Writer.
I
love
Quora,
I
like
hearing
what
people
ask
and
reading
responses,
and
I
also
love
that
I
can
distribute
my
own
writing
by
answering
questions
and
by
posting,
or
even
creating
questions
and
then
answering.
One
morning
last
October,
as
I
was
preparing
for
a
TED
talk
in
San
Diego,
Claudia
came
running
from
upstairs,
jumping
around
all
excited.
She
had
just
been
named
top
Quora
writer.
That
is
how
she
feels
about
it.
And
it
is
a
good
thing,
because
being
a
top
writer
means
more
people
will
follow
you,
more
people
will
talk
about
you,
and
more
people
will
read
and
come
to
like
your
work.
To
become
a
top
Quora
writer
you
need
to
feel
passionate
about
your
topic
and
answer
the
questions
in
an
intelligent
way,
always
adding
value,
seldom
linking
to
yourself
unless
it
is
an
absolute
necessity,
as
it
would
be
if
you
were
to
point
to
a
special
talk
or
something
that
would
add
extra
value,
but
always
staying
on
the
topic.
LinkedIn:
As
of
the
writing
of
this
book
Linked
In
has
a
special
program
called
Influencers
but
its
a
closed
system
and
they
are
not
opening
it
up
further.
I
made
it
into
the
list
together
with
Branson,
President
Obama,
A.J.
Jacobs,
and
other
luminaries
mostly
because
I
posted
heavily
and
on
issues
related
to
people
who
hang
out
in
LinkedIn
a
lot.
It
is
key
to
respect
the
reader
in
LinkedIn
and
write
things
that
are
career
oriented.
My
post
on
why
you
need
to
quit
your
job
reached
over
1.8
million
views
and
became
the
#1
post
in
2014
hen
it
came
to
engagement,
I
am
not
sure
how
they
measure
that.
I
am
not
saying
this
to
brag,
but
to
make
a
point.
When
you
have
hundreds
of
thousands
of
people
C.
Podcast:
A
lot
of
people
say
that
podcast
is
the
new
blogging
but
I
dont
buy
into
that.
It
is
however
a
great
way
to
expand
your
audience
and
learn.
People
now
have
cars
with
access
to
podcast
streams
and
radio
audiences
are
moving
towards
more
specific
content.
If
you
become
the
authority
and
trusted
source
on
your
specific
topic
people
will
want
to
read
your
book.
D.
Go
on
other
peoples
podcasts.
This
is
a
great
way
to
strike
deals.
For
example
you
could
do
a
special
pricing
for
your
book
for
people
who
listen
to
your
friends
podcasts
and
distribute
it
in
PDF
form.
E.
Create
a
story
around
your
book.
When
I
first
published
Choose
Yourself
I
offered
it
in
Bitcoin,
making
it
the
first
book
ever
to
be
sold
through
that
currency.
The
story
landed
me
on
CNBC
where
the
anchor
asked
me
if
I
had
done
it
for
publicity
reasons,
to
which
I
honestly
answered
that
one
way
or
another
I
was
there,
so
yes,
why
not?
I
also
sold
a
fair
amount
of
copies
that
way
too,
and
since
the
value
of
Bitcoin
went
up
huge
since,
it
ended
up
being
as
if
each
one
of
those
books
sold
for
100
dollars.
Not
bad.
F.
Forget
TV.
TV
does
nothing.
Trust
me.
You
sell
zero
books
unless
you
get
an
hour
on
a
popular
show
like
Oprah,
but
that
is
not
so
easy
to
come
by,
and
there
are
other
ways,
for
example,
recently
someone
at
USA
Today
ranked
Choose
Yourself
as
the
second
most
powerful
business
book
of
the
year.
That
lucky
mention
(over
which
I
had
no
control)
got
me
back
to
a
really
low
ranking
number
in
Amazon,
a
very
good
thing.
G.
Free
and
Extra.
Offer
bundles
with
lots
of
valuable
and
free
offers.
For
example,
you
can
design
a
landing
page
on
which
people
can
get
the
book
and
fremiums.
Same
can
be
done
through
people
who
have
newsletter
businesses.
Since YOU own the rights to your book, you can do whatever you want with it.
For
Choose
Yourself,
I
created
a
poster
that
is
designed
like
the
cover
of
the
book
when
you
look
from
afar
but
when
you
get
close
to
it
you
see
clearly
all
67,000
words
of
the
book.
Im
also
making
that
into
a
shirt.
What
will
I
do
with
it?
I
have
no
idea.
But
its
fun
and
I
wanted
to
do
it.
F OREIGN
R IGHTS
I
found
with
my
prior
books
that
the
traditional
publishers
would
more
or
less
wait
for
foreign
publishers
to
call
and
then
they
would
sell
the
rights
and
my
split
would
be
minimal.
Typically
the
split
was
50-50,
but
out
of
my
50
would
come
my
agents
split.
I
was
competing
with
too
many
of
the
other
authors
in
the
publishers
stable
to
get
any
attention
from
foreign
publishers.
Now
I
own
all
the
rights
to
my
book.
Most
people
who
self-publish
arent
thinking
foreign
rights.
You
still
have
to
have
someone
who
is
going
to
be
your
advocate
with
the
foreign
publishers.
So
I
got
a
foreign
rights
agency,
2
Seas
Agency,
to
handle
all
of
the
foreign
rights
on
a
commission
basis.
They
go
to
book
conferences
all
over
the
world
and
have
connections
in
each
country.
In
June,
the
first
month
the
book
was
out,
Marleen
Seegers
from
2
Seas
sold
rights
to:
Brazil
(USD
2500),
China
(USD
4300),
Korea
(USD
5000).
She
is
currently
in
negotiations
with
publishers
from
10
other
countries.
The
three
mentioned
above
are
where
the
contracts
were
finished
blindingly
fast.
No,
CreateSpace
will
assign
one
for
your
paperback
and
your
kindle
right
away
and
free.
No
need
to
pay
for
that
stuff
anymore.
How
do
I
design
that
page
with
all
the
rights
and
the
legal
terms?
Copy
if
from
any
book
you
like.
They
mean
nothing
in
the
end,
or
at
least
they
mean
little.
No,
go
to
acx.com
and
follow
their
guidelines.
Its
easy.
You
DO
however
need
a
book
for
an
audiobook
to
appear
in
amazon
as
a
pre-requisite
so
you
can
link
to
it,
so
do
the
book
first.
No,
in
fact
most
best-seller
books
have
a
low
star
review
first,
it
is
like
a
rite
of
passage,
a
badge
of
honor,
it
means
your
book
is
being
read
and
caused
a
reaction.
These
are
everywhere
but
they
will
vanish
soon.
I
had
someone
do
that
to
my
books
and
I
put
a
one
star
review
saying
I
had
nothing
to
do
with
it.
People
do
read
those
and
if
they
are
written
by
the
actual
author
they
may
respect
it,
if
they
dont
then
I
dont
care.
If
someone
uses
your
name
as
author
or
foreword
and
that
is
not
true,
you
can
report
it
to
Amazon,
they
will
take
it
out.
Sure.
Every
one
of
these
questions
is
a
Google
away,
but
I
find
that
Amazon
is
the
source,
and
whatever
appears
in
Amazon
will
eventually
make
it
to
every
other
venue.
Amazon
will
give
you
guidelines
(a
low
level
minimum),
in
general,
depending
on
what
you
want
to
do
you
will
price
for
that.
If
you
want
more
people
to
buy
the
book
then
charge
less.
Do
not
make
the
mistake
of
pricing
too
high,
you
want
readers,
that
is
the
purpose
of
writing
books.
Yes.
It
is
a
good
idea
to
offer
the
book
around
for
people
to
read
it
before
you
launch
it
and
ask,
if
they
are
willing
to,
to
give
an
HONEST
review.
If
you
have
100
reviews
on
day
one
people
will
get
suspicious
and
will
start
giving
you
one
star
reviews
because
they
will
label
you
as
someone
who
is
trying
to
scam
the
system.
It
is
not
worth
it.
It
takes
away
from
your
message.
Do
ask
your
true
fans
to
help
you,
but
remember
that
you
cannot
solicit
reviews
unless
you
specifically
want
them
with
truth.
Integrity
is
a
part
of
writing
your
best
work.
TV
does
nothing
for
book
sales.
Wayne
Dyer
went
on
Oprah
for
his
latest
book,
and,
even
though
I
dont
follow
all
of
the
numbers,
I
do
know
it
hit
the
New
York
Times
best-seller
list
but
only
for
a
week
or
two.
That
was
it.
TV
is
useless.
Should I go on Podcasts?
Yes.
Absolutely.
Go
on
as
many
Podcasts
as
you
would
like.
That
is
exactly
what
Tony
Robbins
did
with
his
book
Money
that
I
believe
is
still
in
the
NY
Times
list.
And
that
is
what
all
authors
that
know
what
they
are
doing
do.
Because
podcasts
open
the
door
to
new
audiences
that
otherwise
you
would
not
know
existed.
Yes
Bad
reviews
seem
to
go
with
the
territory.
I
would
never
engage
with
a
bad
review
because
it
gives
the
reviewer
power.
It
signals
that
the
author
is
giving
more
attention
to
someone
who
is
bad-mouthing
the
book
instead
of
pouring
her
energy
towards
true
fans
that
loved
it.
No.
It
does
not
pay,
and
it
is
very
expensive.
Unless
you
can
do
it
yourself,
and
in
a
professional
way.
How
long
should
my
book
be?
Nobody
cares,
as
long
as
you
are
offering
something
special.
A
40-page
booklet
in
six
by
nine
is
pretty
solid
these
days.
Many
sell
for
2.99
and
do
very
well.
In
fiction
it
is
a
whole
different
story,
your
novel
can
be
anywhere
from
100
pages
(a
novella)
to
a
masterpiece
of
500
pages.
Worry
more
about
offering
a
good
product
rather
than
the
length,
and
you
will
see
that
the
length
takes
care
of
itself.
I NTERVIEW
WITH
H UGH
H OWE
James
Altucher:
This
is
James
Altucher
at
the
James
Altucher
Show
and
I
have
a
very
special
guest
today,
but
first
welcome
to
my
cohost,
Aaron
Brabham.
Aaron,
hows
it
going?
Aaron
Brabham:
Man,
Im
doing
great
James.
Its
another
beautiful
sunny
day
in
Orlando
although
its
a
bit
chilly.
Only
high
of
63
today.
James
Altucher:
Dont
make
me
jealous.
You
know
its
negative
three
degrees
here
in
New
York.
Aaron Brabham: Oh, is it? I didn't even know that James. I'm sorry.
Aaron
Brabham:
All
right,
so
James
look,
you
know
for
all
of
your
guests
I
always
know
the
name
in
the
very
least,
if
not
I'm
very
familiar
with
their
work,
but
today
I
was
unfamiliar
with
your
guest
name,
so
I
had
to
do
a
little
research.
I
want
you
to
tell
your
listeners
who
the
guest
is
and
why
you
decided
to
have
him
on
your
show.
James
Altucher:
Sure.
First
off,
his
names
Hugh
Howey.
Hes
the
best-selling
author
of
the
Wool
series.
Its
a
science
fiction
series.
Theres
something
very
unique
about
this
series
in
that
it
was
self-published.
He
had
no
publisher
for
it.
He
just
basically
uploaded
his
files
to
Amazon,
published
the
book.
As
he
explains
in
the
interview,
well
youll
see,
it
was
his
ninth
book
that
he
had
self-
published
and
the
book
just
took
off
and
became
this
massive
bestseller.
Hes
made,
I
don't
know,
seven
figures
on
these
books.
He
wrote
an
entire
series
and
then
another
series
after
that.
Ridley
Scott
bought
the
movie
rights.
Two
years
ago
or
two
and
a
half
years
ago,
this
guy
was
shelving
books
in
a
bookstore
making
$10.00
an
hour.
And
then
choosing
himself
by;
you
know
a
lot
of
people
want
to
be
writers,
but
they
get
rejected
by
the
publishing
industry
and
they
give
up.
He
chose
himself.
He
uploaded
the
files
to
Amazon.
He
published
himself
and
after
the
course
of
nine
novels
a
book
finally
hit
the
bestseller
list
and
he
quit
his
job.
Hes
made
his
own
career
and
many
people
have
done
this.
Hes
not
the
only
one.
We
discuss
this
on
the
interview.
Its
really
a
fascinating
way
to
choose
yourself
and
its
a
vehicle
thats
open
to
anyone.
I
want
to
tell
you
one
other
thing.
I
just
came
back
from
Amazon
where
I
was
visiting
their
self-publishing
group,
and
those
guys
all
they
think
about
is
how
they
can
help
writers
self-publish
more
books,
make
more
money.
Theyre
very
writer-oriented.
Its
just
an
excellent
vehicle
for
choosing
yourself
and
Hugh
Howey
is
a
great
example
of
it.
Plus,
by
the
way,
hes
an
excellent
writer.
I
mean
I
highly
recommend
not
only
the
Wool
series,
but
many
of
his
books.
Aaron
Brabham:
Yeah,
thats
outstanding.
You
know
its
good
to
see
that
Amazon
is
still
sticking
to
their
roots,
you
know,
because
they
originally
started
their
company
for
book
publishing
and
of
course
its
transformed
with
the
Kindle
and
your
Choose
Yourself
book
was
huge
and
you
self-published
it
through
some
of
their
software.
It
makes
me
happy
to
hear
that
they
still
have
their
roots.
Well,
James
lets
not
delay
any
further.
Lets
jump
right
into
the
interview.
James Altucher: Great Aaron. Thanks. So, Hugh Howey, welcome to the show.
James
Altucher:
Hugh,
many
of
the
listeners
might
not
know
exactly
who
you
are,
but
Ill
give
a
brief
bio
and
then
I
have
some
questions
about
your
bio
which
you
can
elaborate
on.
Basically
youre
the
bestselling
author
of
Wool.
Essentially
youve
written
about
24
novels
that
are
on
Amazon
were
bought
by
Ridley
Scott,
is
that
correct?
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
the
number
of
novels
is
probably
inflated
by
the
fact
that
some
were
serialized,
but
yeah
many
15
or
so
novels
that
James
Altucher:
Okay,
only
15
novels.
Only
10
more
than
Thomas
Pynchon
has
written.
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
I
think
Thomas
would
say
that
he
aims
for
quality
over
quantity,
I
don't
know.
James
Altucher:
I
don't
know.
Ive
read
a
good
chunk
of
your
novels.
If
youve
written
15,
Ive
probably
read
at
least
8
or
9
of
them
and
I
would
say
you
have
very
high
quality,
but
whats
really
interesting
in
your
story
theres
two
things
that
are
interesting
that
I
want
to
get
to.
One
is
how
you
got
to
be
a
bestselling
novelist
was
a
very
unique
path
that
most
people
have
not
taken.
I
think
its
a
path
that
can
be
actually
followed
by
many
people
who
listen
to
this
podcast
to
some
extent.
Not
maybe
to
the
highest
extent,
but
to
some
extent.
I
think
also
you
have
a
site
authorearnings.com
which
discusses
kind
of
the
pros
and
cons
of
the
particular
approach
youve
taken,
so
I
want
to
get
right
into
that,
but
I
want
to
start
off
with
a
little
more
background.
While
you
were
writing
or
basically
before
you
started
selling
big
quantities
of
fiction,
what
were
you
doing
for
a
living?
Hugh
Howey:
I
was
paying
my
bills
as
a
bookseller.
When
I
wrote
my
first
novel
I
was
out
of
work.
I
was
trying
to
help
launch
a
website
doing
book
reviews
and
I
was
covering
the
book
industry
from
the
inside
doing
interviews
with
authors,
going
to
book
conferences,
trying
to
review
a
book
a
day.
Hugh Howey: Yeah, I was using the World Wide Web. I was on the internet.
James
Altucher:
The
internet,
okay
thats
new
technology.
Howd
that
work
out
for
you?
James
Altucher:
Did
it
motivate
you
because
were
you
thinking
to
yourself
Gosh
these
guys
suck
so
bad
I
can
write
a
novel
better
than
them?
Hugh
Howey:
No
way.
What
happened
I
started
one
of
these
conferences
and
meetings;
well,
I
was
doing
interviews.
I
was
doing
at
least
one
interview
a
week
with
really
topnotch
writers
and
I
was
going
to
conferences
and
meeting
them
and
what
was
cool
is
learning
how
down
to
earth
and
normal
these
people
were
and
the
fact
that
they
all
had
day
jobs.
The
only
thing
different
with
them
and
myself
was
that
they
got
up
every
morning
and
spent
a
couple
hours
writing.
I
realized
I
was
doing
the
same
thing
with
Hugh
Howey:
Oh,
it
varies.
But
most
of
them
had
to
write
before
they
went
to
work.
A
lot
of
them
were
university
professors
or
they
had
jobs
in
journalism
and
so
they
devoted
a
couple
hours
here
and
there.
Some
of
them,
you
know,
what
I
model
myself
on
were
the
writers
who
were
getting
up
at
5:00
in
the
morning
to
write
before
they
went
in
to
their
day
job.
James
Altucher:
So
they
werent
making
a
living
from
their
writing.
It
was
just
sort
of
out
of
the
pleasure
of
writing
fiction
and
having
it
published
and
having
a
few
readers
that
drove
them
to
this?
Hugh
Howey:
Yes,
some
of
these
were
New
York
Times
bestselling
authors.
I
assumed
they
were
millionaires
and
that
started
dispelling
to
me
the
fantastical
image
I
had
of
what
a
writers
life
was
like.
That
helped
me.
I
think
not
putting
authors
on
pedestals
has
been
crucial
to
me
visualizing
myself
as
not.
I
don't
have
delusions
of
grandeur
and
I
thought
writers
were
some
kind
of
special
magical
beasts
and
it
was
really
nice
to
get
to
know
them
and
for
them
to
offer
encouragement.
I
realized
I
was
writing
a
couple
hours
every
day
for
the
website
and
for
my
blog,
so
why
not
put
that
time
into
writing
the
fiction
that
Ive
always
dreamed
of
writing.
James
Altucher:
Did
that
disturb
you
a
little
bit
though
that
they
were
New
York
Times
bestsellers
and
they
werent
making
a
living
at
it.
They
still
had
to
teach
or
be
a
journalist
or
whatever.
Did
that
strike
you
that
maybe
the
system
was
broken
a
little
bit?
Cause
a
New
York
Times
bestseller
is
going
to
sell
like
what,
30,000
to
50,000
books
in
a
couple
weeks.
That
strikes
me
as
a
way
to
make
a
living.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
some
of
them,
you
know,
you
don't
have
to
sell
quite
that
many
to
hit
the
list
especially
those
who
are
non-fiction
New
York
Times
bestsellers.
Its
pretty
startling
how
you
can
creep
onto
the
list
with
just
a
few
thousand
hardback
sales
in
the
opening
week
by
targeting
certain
bookstores
that
report
their
sales.
Being
a
New
York
Times
bestselling
author
is
something
that
follows
you
for
life,
so
some
of
the
authors
that
I
met
in
my
bookstore
were
New
York
Times
bestselling
authors,
but
they
hadnt
hit
the
list
in
several
years.
So,
youre
trying
to
live
off
of
for
some
its
maybe
$25,000.00
or
$50,000.00
advance
and
after
your
agent
and
your
taxes
youre
looking
at
trying
to
live
off
of
$25,000.00
or
$30,000.00
even
on
the
high
end.
James
Altucher:
So,
even
a
New
York
Times
bestseller,
theyre
only
gonna
get
a
$25,000.00
advance
on
their
next
book
on
average
would
you
say?
Hugh
Howey:
I
don't
know
what
the
average
would
be,
but
I
mean
I
can
only
talk
about
the
anecdotal
numbers
that
people
would
share
with
me.
The
six
figure
advance
kind
of
had
its
heyday
for
a
while,
but
its
very
few
authors
who
get
that
much
money
upfront.
For
a
debuting
author
the
number
that
I
see
most
often
is
around
$5,000.00
as
an
average.
Of
course,
the
ones
you
hear
about
are
the
six
and
seven
figure
authors.
I
think
its
dangerous
to
model
our
expectations
around
the
outliers.
I'm
an
outlier
in
the
self-
publishing
world
and
theyre
outliers
in
the
traditional
publishing
world,
but
most
people
don't
get
deals
like
that.
James
Altucher:
Well,
okay
so
you
were
doing
this
website
and
talking
to
lots
of
authors
and
then
you
decided
to
devote
your
time
more
to
your
own
fiction.
This
was
like
inspirational
to
you
talking
to
these
authors.
What
happened
next
in
terms
of
making
a
living?
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
not
much.
I
wrote
my
first
book
and
Id
planned
on
giving
it
away
and
gave
it
to
friends
and
family
and
the
feedback
was
that
I
should
actually
try
to
get
this
published,
that
it
was
better
than
the
last
thing
they
had
read
from
the
bookstore.
Quite
a
few
people
told
me
that.
I
started
doing
some
research
to
find
out
what
that
was
involved
in
getting
a
book
published
and
learned
about
the
query
letter
which
I
found
was
more
difficult
to
write
than
the
novel
itself.
That
one
page
took
almost
as
much
time
as
writing
the
hundred
thousand
word
novel.
James
Altucher:
This
is
the
letter
that
you
would
send
to
publishers
describing
your
book?
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
right.
This
is
you
going
from
being
a
fiction
writer
to
a
business
pitch
artist.
I
found
it
very
difficult
to
write
like
a
one-paragraph
synopsis
of
either
who
I
am
or
what
the
book
was
or
why
this
agent
should
care
about
it.
I
did
that
for
a
few
weeks.
Sent
it
to
agents
and
to
small
presses
that
took
un-agented
submissions
and
I
got
two
small
presses
interested.
One
made
an
offer
that
I
was
happy
with
and
I
was
shocked
that
someone
was
going
to
pay
me
money
for
this
manuscript.
It
was
very
little
money,
but
it
was
I
anticipated
having
to
spend
money
to
self-publish
it.
To
kind
of
cut
to
where
I
am
now
it
went
well,
but
I
saw
that
the
tools
they
were
using
James Altucher: I'm sorry Hugh. What was the title of that book?
James Altucher: Okay great. Then you continued to write a series on that.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
when
I
published
the
second
book
I
had
an
offer
from
the
publisher.
They
sent
me
a
contract
for
the
second
book
and
I
thought
I
think
I
can
do
everything
that
theyre
doing
on
my
own
and
have
more
creative
control
and
quicker
time
to
market
and
I
would
keep
a
larger
share
of
the
earnings.
This
time
I
wasnt
thinking
about
e-books
at
all.
I
was
producing
e-books,
but
they
were
an
afterthought.
James Altucher: What wasnt the publisher doing that you thought you could do?
Hugh
Howey:
They
were
doing
a
good
job.
Its
just
I
wanted
to
change
small
things
throughout
the
process
and
I
felt
like
I
was
annoying
them
to
have
to
email
them
and
say
Could
we
tweak
the
back
jacket
this
way?
I
wanted
to
fire
up
InDesign
and
Photoshop
and
do
some
of
the
stuff
myself
and
it
seemed
to
be
quicker
that
way.
I
was
also
doing
a
lot
of
research
on
which
print-on-demand
company
to
use
and
how
to
do
the
e-book,
things
that
they
werent
doing
yet,
and
what
their
publishing
model.
I
saw
that
maybe
these
were
helpful
avenues
to
explore.
Then
I
was
walking
them
through
using
Lightning
Source
to
try
to
get
Baker
&
Taylor
and
Barnes
&Noble
distribution.
I
started
thinking.
Man
I'm
doing
a
lot
of
the
publishing
work
on
my
own.
Why
not
just
take
on
a
few
extra
things
like
the
editing
and
hire
that
out
and
strike
out
on
my
own,
basically
do
what
theyre
doing.
James
Altucher:
Striking
out
on
your
own
of
course
makes
a
big
difference
financially
because
instead
of
getting,
I
don't
know
what
your
royalty
was,
but
instead
of
getting
lets
say
a
15
percent
royalty,
you
could
get
80,
90
percent
or
does
Amazon
have
70
percent.
I
don't
know
how
that
financially
affected
you
given
the
advances
you
were
getting
from
the
small
publisher,
but
I
can't
imagine
they
were
giving
huge
advances
either.
Hugh
Howey:
No,
they
werent.
It
wasnt
all
financial,
but
it
definitely
paid
dividends.
I
started
within
a
year
of
writing
I
was
making
at
least
$100.00
a
month
which
to
me
I
lived
on
a
very
small
budget
and
never
dreamed
that
people
were
going
to
pay
for
my
writing.
So,
having
my
cable
bill
paid
by
my
hobby
every
month
was
pretty
startling.
I
think
that
was
only
because
I
was
in
control
of
it
all.
James
Altucher:
So
Hugh,
you
wrote
the
first
novel.
You
did
it
with
a
small
press.
What
got
you
from
writing
like
one
novel
to
having
this
huge
amount
of
novels
and
then
making
a
living
from
it?
Like
what
were
you
doing?
What
changed?
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
the
biggest
thing;
I
think
this
is
the
difference
in
the
two
methods
of
publishing
now.
I
have
friends
who
have
published
through
traditional
publishers
who
were
given
one
or
two
books
to
hit
it
big
and
if
they
didn't
have
a
blockbuster
there
were
enough
other
up-and-comers
for
publishers
to
choose
from
that
someone
else
was
given
a
chance.
I
was
able
to
kind
of
ignore
the
challenge
of
continuously
writing
books
and
selling
them
to
publishers
and
just
concentrate
on
the
writing
itself.
I
know
that
sounds
counterintuitive.
You
would
think
that
a
self-published
author
would
spend
more
time
doing
other
things,
but
when
I
got
busy
was
later
in
my
career
where
I
signed
on
with
publishers.
When
I
was
working
in
a
bookstore
I
spent
my
time
writing
the
stories
that
I
enjoyed
and
getting
them
out
there
and
then
moving
on
to
the
next
one.
I
didn't
worry
about
how
that
book
was
selling.
I
didn't
spend
a
lot
of
time
promoting
it.
I
didn't
care
what
the
rankings
or
sales
were
doing
on
that
book.
My
idea
was
I
love
writing
now.
Its
been
10
years
writing
and
later
in
life
I
might
have
20
or
30
novels
that
I
can
tell
people
that
I
wrote
and
to
set
up
a
booth
in
an
arts
and
crafts
show
or
go
to
book
conferences
and
set
up
a
table,
but
you
know
I
wasnt
going
to
make
it
with
one
book.
I
was
gonna
have
to
write
all
the
stories
that
were
in
my
head
and
get
them
all
available
and
they
werent
getting
old.
It
wasnt
like
they
were
dying
on
the
vine.
They
were
brand
new
to
everyone
who
hadnt
discovered
them
yet.
James
Altucher:
You
basically
were
working
in
a
bookstore,
but
you
felt
your
best
marketing
for
your
books,
in
some
sense,
was
writing
a
new
book?
It
was
almost
like
summiting
my
first
mountain
and
I
got
so
addicted
to
the
high
of
being
up
there
and
feeling
that
sense
of
accomplishment
that
all
I
wanted
to
do
was
go
climb
another
peak.
I
didn't
want
to
go
around
the
country
showing
people
slides
of
my
not
nearing
exploits
and
try
to
be
someone
who
spoke
about
moutaining.
I
wanted
to
do
it
again.
My
passion
was
writing
and
I
say
this
kind
of
with
a
lot
of
stark,
but
unfortunately
I
didn't
get
10
years
of
writing
in
before
things
took
off.
I
was
just
putting
books
out
there
and
I
think
within
2
or
3
years
I
had
about
5,000
books
sold
which
is
what
Id
planned
to
do
in
my
lifetime
if
I
was
lucky
to
sell
that
many
books.
You
see
I
had
very
low
expectations
this
whole
time.
But
then
this
one
short
story
I
threw
up
there
took
off
and
kind
of
gave
me
an
opportunity
to
focus
my
efforts
on
this
series
and
the
sales
got
to
the
point
that
I
could
quit
my
day
job
and
really
focus
everything
on
my
writing
career.
James
Altucher:
Its
interesting
because
you
call
it
a
short
story,
but
it
was
about
70
pages
___
__.
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
its
12,000
words,
so
when
its
formatted
by
itself
its
about
40
pages
long.
I
guess
its
considered
a
novelette
would
be
its
technical
term.
James
Altucher:
And
then
so
you
wrote
Wool,
one
through
four,
and
then
you
did
the
Wool
Omnibus
which
is
when
I
read
it.
By
that
point
it
had
really
taken
off.
I
mean
your
Wool,
one
through
four,
plus
the
Omnibus
was
like
one
through
five
on
Amazon
science
fiction
list.
Hugh
Howey:
That
was
an
unexpected
benefit
of
having
written
it
in
parts,
but
the
exposure
of
the
series
was,
you
know,
if
you
see
one
book
in
a
bestseller
list
it
looks
like
every
other
title.
It
just
blends
in.
But
when
all
five
of
the
parts
of
Wool
were
all
sprinkled
throughout
the
list
and
all
kind
of
climbed
together
I
think
they
gave
the
series
a
lot
more
visibility
and
they
supported
one
another.
Yeah,
at
one
point
it
was
pretty
obnoxious.
You
would
get
on
Amazon
and
you
would
see
all
five
parts
in
the
Top
Ten.
When
I
combine
them
into
the
Omnibus
theres
individual
parts
kind
of
died
down
and
the
standalone
novel
is
what
went
on
to
hit
the
New
York
Times
list
and
do
really
well
by
itself.
Hugh
Howey:
Yes.
Right
up
until,
I
think
my
last
day
was
right
around
when
the
Omnibus
was
released
because
even
when
I
only
had
three
or
four
parts
out
I
was
making
as
much
in
a
day
as
I
made
at
a
week
at
the
bookstore.
I
was
working
a
30-hour
job
for
$10.00
an
hour.
That
job
really
allowed
me
a
lot
of
time
to
write
and
what
time
I
wasnt
writing
I
was
spending
around
books.
I
was
doing
a
lot
of
author
events
and
dealing
with
reps
from
publishing
houses
and
it
was
very
useful
I
think
just
to
have
those
years
spent
in
a
bookstore
while
I
was
writing.
It
taught
me
a
lot
about
the
industry.
James
Altucher:
Bookstore
___
___
that
they
had
like
this
writer
there
or
did
they
all
have
kind
of
a
novel
in
a
desk
drawer
that
they
wanted
to
put
out?
Hugh
Howey:
No,
my
boss
who
sat
right
beside
me.
It
was
really
just
the
two
of
us
ran
the
bookstore
and
we
had
some
student
employees
who
filled
in
every
now
and
then,
but
the
two
of
us
ran
the
bookstore.
He
didn't
really
think
of
me
as
a
real
writer
cause
I
was
writing
genre
fiction.
Hes
still
a
really
good
friend
of
mine,
but
I
think
hes
baffled
by
it
all
because
he
really
loves
literary
fiction
and
thats
what
he
likes
to
write.
I
like
to
read
literary
fiction
as
well,
so
we
have
a
lot
of
the
same
taste.
But
he
did
not
like
to
shelve
science
fiction
or
young
adult
up
on
the
front
shelves
and
I
was
always
fighting
to
get
those
books
better
placement.
Yeah,
we
had
a
fun
relationship
and
I
think
when
the
series
started
blowing
up
he
was
pretty
baffled
by
it
all.
James
Altucher:
The
series
started
blowing
up
and
you
quit
the
job
to
do
this
full-
time.
What
did
you
do
with
this
new
time?
Were
you
writing
more
or
were
you
dealing
more
with
the
publishing
side
of
the
business?
Hugh
Howey:
I
would
say
I
was
writing
about
the
same
amount.
My
day
job
was
replaced
with
a
day
job
spent
answering
emails
and
doing
a
lot
of
traveling,
dealing
with
demands
from
agents
and
publishers,
and
people
who
wanted
me
to
come
to
conferences,
a
lot
of
social
media
interaction.
My
thrill
with
having
a
readership
has
been
having
something
in
common
with
all
these
strangers
online
and
my
use
of
social
media
has
basically
been
to
make
myself
available
to
existing
readers.
I
don't
really
use
social
media
to
try
to
win
over
new
readers.
I
just
don't
think
that
works
very
well.
I
became
really
swamped
with
emails
and
contacts
on
Facebook
and
through
Twitter,
and
I
would
spend
a
couple
hours
a
day
just
handling
those
sorts
of
things.
James
Altucher:
Well,
its
really
the
opposite
of
a
lot
of
marketing
efforts
of
writers
where
they
do
use
those.
You
know
a
publisher
will
ask
you
Whats
your
social
media
platform
like
because
they
expect
you
to,
you
know,
the
average
writer
to
use
that
social
media
platform
to
sell
books.
But
you
were
using
it
more
to
build
community
among
existing
readers
and
I
think
that
worked
very
well
for
you.
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
it
works
better
because
its
disingenuous
I
think
for
a
writer
to
tell
strangers
Youre
going
to
love
my
book
or
My
book
is
great.
Or
maybe
that
just
takes
some
kind
of
self-confidence
that
I
don't
have.
I
think
its
more
effective
to
have
a
great
relationship
with
your
existing
readers
and
those
are
the
people
who
are
going
around
telling
other
people
You
should
check
out
this
work.
I
mean
I
don't
read
books
that
are
recommended
to
me
from
publishers
and
authors,
people
who
have
a
financial
stake
in
my
decision
because
I
don't
know
what
their
I
guess
I
know
what
their
goal
is.
Their
goal
is
to
make
money
off
me
and
I
understand
that
completely,
but
I
would
rather
listen
to
my
friends
and
family
whose
goal
is
to
make
me
happy
with
a
good
book
and
I
think
those
are
the
people
we
listen
to
more.
We
trust
friends
and
family
and
word
of
mouth
more
than
we
trust
either
a
paid
critic
or
the
people
who
have
a
financial
stake
in
that
product.
James
Altucher:
Well,
its
interesting
because
after
I
became
a
fan
of
your
books,
I
also
found
books
that
you
would
either
blurb
or
mention.
For
instance,
I
really
like
the
Marcus
Sakey
book
Brilliance
on
your
recommendation.
I
never
would
have
known
about
it,
so
thats
really
true.
I
wanted
to
get
into
kind
of
the
technical
details
at
this
point.
So,
essentially
what
was
your
writing
schedule
like
at
this
point
and
just
technically
how
did
you
publish,
like,
what
platforms
you
used
and
so
on?
How
did
you
get
your
books
out
there?
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
I'm
more
creative
in
the
morning.
I
do
my
best
writing
early
when
my
kind
of
my
dream
state
I
guess
is
still
lingering.
I
find
my
vocabulary
is
a
little
more
its
not
that
the
correct
word
is
always
available;
its
just
that
I
use
more
creative
word
sentence
structures
early
in
the
morning.
A
lot
of
times
I
have
to
revise
those
scenes
to
make
sense
of
it
later
in
the
process
which
I
do
better
in
the
afternoon.
Everyone
has
to
figure
that
out
for
themselves.
Theres
no
right
answer
for
when
to
write.
The
right
answer
is
to
find
time
to
write.
The
people
who
are
doing
it
wrong
are
the
people
who
think
they
don't
have
time
in
the
day
to
do
it.
James
Altucher:
Why
do
you
think
they
think
that
and
then
they
watch
four
hours
of
night
of
TV?
What
things
did
you
have
to
eliminate
in
your
schedule
to
find
the
time
to
write?
Because
you
already
had
a
schedule,
so
you
had
to
eliminate
something
in
order
to
write.
Hugh
Howey:
For
me,
I
stopped
playing
video
games
and
I
stopped
watching
TV
and
I
was
spending
several
hours
a
day
during
those
two
things.
I'm
still
able
to
get
as
much
reading
done
as
I
was
before
and
I
just
replaced
some
of
my
passive
media
consumption
with
my
active
media
production.
I
think
we
can
all
do
that.
Its
just
difficult
to
do.
Writing
is
a
lot
like
dieting
and
exercise.
Its
something
that
we
all
wish
we
could
do
more
of
and
we
have
a
hard
time
finding
the
willpower
to
do
any
of
it.
Theres
really
no
answer
to
it
other
than
you
have
to
just
buck
up
and
stop
thinking
about
it
and
dedicate
yourself
to
it.
And
if
you
can't
do
that,
you
know
if
you
can't
write
every
single
day
your
chances
of
making
it
as
a
writer
are
really
difficult.
James
Altucher:
I
think
people
don't
realize
the
impact
of,
like
lets
say
you
just
write
500
words
a
day.
Well,
by
the
end
of
a
year
thats
180,000
words.
James
Altucher:
Again
many
traditionally
published
authors
write
like
three
or
four
great
novels
in
their
lives.
If
youre
writing
two
novels
a
year
or
more
its
enormous.
People
don't
realize
the
impact
of
a
little
bit
a
day
how
quickly
that
adds
up
to
something
significant.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
and
if
you
do
that
for
five
years,
you
know
your
first
two
novels
might
not
be
great
and
thats
part
of
writing
a
lot
of
novels
is
you
have
to
write
a
couple
just
to
learn
what
you
just
to
get
better.
You
do
that
for
five
years.
Lets
say
that
gets
you
five
novels
that
arent
so
good,
but
it
gets
you
five
novels
that
are
great.
Thats
enough
to
five
years
later
to
sit
and
try
to
market
or
at
least
if
nothing
else
be
proud
of.
I
think
anybody
who
dedicates
five
years
to
writing
every
single
day
has
a
good
chance
of
making
supplemental
income
off
their
work.
James Altucher: Well, how many books did you have out before you quit your job?
James
Altucher:
Your
ninth
title,
so
nine
novels
or
novelettes
or
whatever
you
want
to
call
them,
you
had
written
and
published
before
you
quit
your
day
job?
Hugh
Howey:
Correct,
yeah.
And
I
had
planned
on,
you
know
this
was
two
and
a
half
years
in;
I
had
planned
on
writing
for
ten
years
before
I
even
worried
about
what
I
was
making
off
my
writing.
James Altucher: So, in two and a half years you wrote nine novels?
Hugh
Howey:
Seven
novels,
a
novelette
and
then
Wool
was
my
ninth
which
was
a
novelette,
and
then
I
had
some
short
stories
that
Id
also
put
on
my
website
for
free.
James
Altucher:
Just
as
an
aside
I
have
to
tell
you
The
Plagiarist
and
The
Hurricane,
I
think
thats
the
title,
those
were
two
of
my
favorites
as
well.
I
enjoyed
Wool,
but
I
really
liked
some
of
your
standalone
science
fiction
and
The
Hurricane
was
more
young
adult,
but
I
really
enjoyed
those
books
as
well.
Hugh
Howey:
I
have
a
lot
of
people
tell
me
that
The
Hurricane
is
my
best
work
and
that,
I
believe,
was
my
first
or
second
NaNoWriMo
book.
National
Novel
Writing
Month
is
something
I
recommend
to
anyone
who
wants
to
make
a
living
as
a
writer
because
it
teaches
you
the
value
of
writing
every
day.
If
you
miss
a
single
day,
like,
you
use
500
words
a
day
as
your
goal.
If
you
miss
a
day
you
have
to
write
a
1,000
words
the
next
day
in
order
to
maintain
your
pace.
If
you
miss
that
second
day,
now
youre
up
to
1,500
words
and
so
you
can
really
the
same
is
true
of
eating
right
and
exercising.
Taking
one
day
off
just
snowballs
into
taking
a
week
or
a
month
off.
You
just
can't
do
that
if
this
is
your
goal
and
what
you
want
to
do
with
your
life.
You
have
to
be
consistent
and
NaNoWriMo
teaches
that
better
than
any
other
program
out
there.
James
Altucher:
You
know
its
not
just
the
word
count.
I
find
for
myself
if
I
don't
write
every
day,
then
my
writing
is
not
as
strong
the
next
day.
Like
I
have
to
kind
of
stay
this
kind
of
consistent.
I
don't
know.
Its
almost
like
a
muscle
that
you
have
to
keep
in
shape
or
else
you
have
to
reduce
how
much
you
have
to
weightlift
because
you
wont
be
as
strong
any
more.
Hugh
Howey:
Not
only
that,
I
think
my
best
writing
comes
when
I'm
writing
a
lot.
The
idea
that
it
takes
five
years
to
write
a
novel,
the
disjointed
mess
that
I
would
write
if
I
spent
five
years
writing
a
novel
it
would
be
atrocious.
I
think
when
people
say
they
spent
five
years
writing
a
novel
it
means
they
started
it,
then
they
procrastinated
for
five
years
and
then
they
finished
it.
My
best
writing
comes
from
when
I'm
writing
5,000
words
in
a
day.
Thats
when
I
stay
in
my
book
and
in
my
characters
mind
and
the
words
are
flowing.
I
don't
think
people
should
have
a
word
count
because
the
danger
of
that
is
that;
lets
say
you
aim
for
500.
Usually
500
words
just
primes
my
pump
and
my
next
2,000
words
are
great.
But
if
you
set
a
hard
goal
for
yourself,
then
when
you
hit
that
goal
you
give
yourself
an
excuse
to
say
Okay,
I'm
done
and
walk
away
from
it.
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
you
should
write
as
much
as
you
can
in
a
day
and
set
aside
the
number
of
hours
and
don't
give
yourself
a
word
count
goal.
Just
say
I'm
gonna
write
as
much
as
I
can
for
two
hours
and
if
thats
one
perfect
sentence
thats
gonna
resonate
in
your
readers
minds
for
years,
thats
two
hours
well
spent.
If
its
10,000
words
of
action
and
adventure
that
people
are
gonna
stay
up
till
3:00
in
the
morning
cause
they
can't
put
the
book
down,
thats
2
hours
well
spent.
Use
every
bit
of
free
time
that
you
have
to
further
our
novel
along
and
eventually
youll
complete
it.
James
Altucher:
Do
you
heavily
outline
in
advance
or
do
you
let
it
just
flow?
Hugh
Howey:
I
do
a
lot
of
brainstorming
to
know
my
story
in
advance.
I
make
notes,
but
I
don't
write
a
heavy
outline.
I
think
the
best
method
for
me
to
get
writing
done
is
to
daydream
the
next
days,
like
Ill
do
my
writing
this
morning
which
Ive
already
completed
and
then
Ill
spend
the
rest
of
my
day
thinking
about
tomorrows
writing.
The
one
scene
that
I
need
to
write
that
day.
It
could
be
two
characters
meeting.
It
could
be
them
traveling
a
little
bit
or
a
bar
scene
or
whatever
it
is.
I
daydream
that
scene
all
day
long.
So,
when
I
sit
down
to
write
tomorrow
Ill
know
that
scene.
Ill
know
some
of
the
conversations
they
have.
Ill
know
what
needs
to
happen
during
that
entire
scene.
If
I
finish
that
scene
in
my
head
Ill
daydream
a
little
farther
along,
but
I
always
have
to
know
where
my
story
ends.
You
Lost
the
TV
show
showed
us
what
not
to
do
when
it
comes
to
plotting.
You
have
to
know
what
your
story
is
about
and
what
that
final
scene
is
gonna
be
like
in
order
to
have
some
destination
to
move
toward.
When
I'm
reading
I
can
tell
when
the
author
did
not
know
what
was
gonna
happen
next
and
that
those
books
never
resonate
as
much
with
me.
James
Altucher:
Thats
really
interesting
you
bring
up
Lost
because
the
story
every
step
of
the
way
was
so
powerful
and
so
intriguing
and
yet
you
could
tell,
particularly
in
the
last
two
or
three
episodes,
you
could
tell
the
writers
in
the
beginning
really
had
no
clue
how
this
was
going
to
end.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
you
can
write
some
of
your
best
stuff
when
youre
writing
by
the
seat
of
your
pants
because
youre
just
surprising
yourself
all
the
time
and
youre
just
making
stuff
up
and
making
sure
something
exciting
is
happening
at
every
turn.
But
its
easy
to
do
that
and
to
write
adventures
for
which
there
are
no
adequate
solutions
to
and
then
you
get
into
___
__
__
___
and
all
these
ways
of,
you
know,
its
all
a
dream.
Just
ways
of
tying
things
up
that
are
less
than
satisfying.
I
would
much
rather
have
foreshadowed
events
that
if
you
read
my
novels
a
second
time
you
can
see
these
hints
dropped
in
very
early
that
kind
of
tell
you
exactly
what
the
story
is
gonna
be
about
and
you
just
don't
notice
them
the
first
time
around.
James
Altucher:
Although
so
Wool
eventually
ended
up
being,
you
know
Wool,
Shift
and
Dust
like
the
whole
kind
of
silo
saga.
When
you
were
writing
Wool
did
you
know
how,
you
know,
12
novelettes
later
how
it
was
going
to
wrap
up
like
in
terms
of
sequel
and
prequels
and
all
of
that?
Hugh
Howey:
No,
when
I
wrote
Wool
that
was
the
entire
story,
so
I
didn't
have
anything
else
that
I
wanted
to
write
in
that
world.
If
youve
read
the
novel
you
know
that
after
that
first
story
theres
really
nothing
left
to
write
about
this
character,
so
you
have
to
start
a
new
story
in
the
same
world
about
new
characters,
and
thats
what
I
did.
I
didn't
really
try
to
pick
up
with
existing
characters.
I
used
the
second
book
to
transition
to
a
new
character
who
took
over
for
the
rest
of
the
story.
James
Altucher:
In
general
its
like
you
built
a
world,
populated
it
with
characters
and
every
character
really
could
have
a
story.
Like
you
were
shifting
character
stories
quite
a
bit
throughout
the
whole
series
and
that
allows
even
the
fan
fiction
to
be
popular.
So
you
have
a
lot
of
fans
who
have
now
written
books
within
your
world
and
focusing
on
their
own
characters.
Hugh
Howey:
If
were
able
to
invent
one
character
then
we
should
have
the
freedom
to
move
to
other
characters
or
to
kill
off
characters
and
introduce
other
people
in
other
parts
of
the
world.
Its
just
I
think
we
get
so
attached
to
our
characters
and
were
so
mystified
by
our
ability
to
create
them
even
as
writers
who
know
we
can
do
this.
It
still
seems
magical
when
you
do
it
that
I
think
we
get
a
little
too
attached
to
our
characters.
I
think
for
world
building
its
helpful
to
be
able
to
take
that
ability
to
invent
people
and
invent
crowds
of
them
and
jump
around
and
flesh
out
the
world
a
little
bit
more.
That
also
gives
you
the
freedom
to
kill
off
main
characters
which
heightens
the
tension.
I
think
were
getting
spoiled
in
books
and
movies
and
TV
shows
where
we
know
yeah,
a
lot
of
dangerous
stuff
will
happen,
but
nothing
bad
will
happen
to
my
main
character.
But
once
a
show
or
a
book
shows
that
theyre
willing
to
do
that
to
kill
the
protagonist
that
creates
a
lot
of
tension
for
the
rest
of
the
series.
James
Altucher:
Let
me
ask
you
this.
Lets
say
a
listener
has
a
book
theyve
written.
It
doesnt
matter
how
many
pages.
30
pages
or
500
pages.
Now
they
want
to
publish,
but
they
don't
want
to
go
through
the
whole
publishing
route
and
they
want
to
move
to
self-
publishing
just
like
you
did.
Technically,
what
should
they
do?
Like
whats
kind
of
an
outline
of
steps
to
get
your
book
up
and
out
there
like
in
the
next
week
or
two?
Hugh
Howey:
Ill
tell
you
what
I
would
recommend
and
you
should
get
a
lot
of
other
opinions
because
everyone
has,
you
know,
I
have
my
own
experiences,
but
other
people
would
have
their
anecdotal
evidence
and
their
own
biases.
I
think
there
are
three
formats
to
concentrate
on
and
I
prefer
using
Amazon
services
for
all
three
because
theyre
tightly
integrated
and
I
see
Amazon
as
being
the
best
and
number
one
bookseller
in
the
world,
so
its
where
I
want
to
focus
all
my
efforts.
For
the
e-
book,
I
focused
on
KDP
which
is
the
Kindle
Direct
Publishing.
All
three
of
these
services
by
the
way
are
completely
free.
Everyone
who
has
an
Amazon
account
already
has
a
KDP
account.
You
can
use
your
same
login
or
password
for
buying
stuff
on
Amazon
to
log
in
to
KDP
and
upload
your
first
book.
For
print
books,
I
use
Create
Space.
There
are
other
print-on
-demand
books
that
have
better
distribution
into
bookstores
like
Lightning
Source,
but
Create
Space
is
tightly
integrated
into
Amazon.
It
shows
up
quicker.
There
are
no
fees
for
setting
your
book
up.
The
copies
you
order
for
yourself
are
very
inexpensive.
Your
proof
copies
are
very
inexpensive.
You
can
even
do
a
digital
proof
online
and
not
pay
a
penny
to
produce
your
print
book.
And
then
ACX
which
is
the
audible
format
is
also
a
company
owned
by
Amazon,
and
then
what
that
does
is
populate
your
Amazon
product
page
with
three
different
formats.
It
makes
it
look
a
little
more
professional
and
gives
the
reader
options
and
also
shows
the
e-book
as
being
a
discounted
price
from
the
print
book
which
is
very
helpful.
Having
print
books
is
crucial.
You
can
take
them
to
events
and
do
signed
copies
and
stuff
like
that.
James
Altucher:
Ill
just
add
so
Ive
self-published
Ive
traditionally
published
five
books
and
Ive
self-published
about
five
books
and
I
use
the
exact
same
three
parts
of
Amazon.
So,
Create
Space,
Kindle
Direct,
Audible.
I
didn't
always
do
audio,
but
I
found
again
populating
that
page
makes
the
book
look
more
professional.
Actually
I
found
like
I
kind
of
wrote
more
self-help
or
personal
improvement.
I
found
that
I
was
getting
a
lot
of
sales
through
my
audible
book
that
I
did
not
expect;
I
was
surprised.
James
Altucher:
Yes,
I'm
doing
my
own
readings
and
I
do
them
completely
unabridged.
I
can't
really
read
off
of
a
page.
I
get
a
little
bored.
So,
I
just
kind
of
riff
while
I'm
reading
my
book.
Hugh
Howey:
Oh,
thats
cool.
I
love
your
Facebook
posts,
your
blog
posts.
I
think
theyre
really
useful.
So,
knowing
that
youre
creating
that
sort
of
content
for
the
audio
format
will
probably
be
the
first
thing
I
look
up
after
we
get
off
the
air
here.
Hugh
Howey:
Ive
done
one
only
because
they
asked.
It
was
an
autobiographical
piece
that
I
did
for
the
Kindle
Worlds
program
and
Kurt
Vonneguts
World.
My
wife
and
I
went
up
to
New
York
and
they
put
us
in
a
booth
and
we
did
the
audio
for
that.
She
did
Montana
Wallpacks
parts
and
I
did
my
autobiographical
parts.
James Altucher: Thats great. Just out of curiosity did you use John Marshall Videos?
Hugh
Howey:
I
may
have.
It
was
Brilliance
Audio
set
it
up,
but
I
think
it
may
have
been
John
Marshalls.
New
York
Times
Square;
just
a
little
north
and
west
of
Times
Square.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
thats
who
I
use
as
well.
Thats
who
I
think
Harry
Potter
used
their
facility
as
well
and
Bill
Clinton
used
their
facility.
Hugh Howey: I remember seeing his work on the wall there when you walk in.
James
Altucher:
Okay,
so
nine
books
in.
You
use
Amazon
for
everything.
From
beginning
to
end,
you
have
a
book
done,
from
beginning
to
end
how
long
before
it
appears
on
Amazon
using
all
their
tools?
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
once
you
have
the
final
manuscript
if
you
hit
publish
on
the
e-
book
and
its
usually
up
within
12
hours,
sometimes
less
than
that.
With
Create
Space
book,
once
you
finalize
the
proof
and
hit
okay,
its
usually
up
within
a
day.
Audio
takes
longer.
They
do
a
quality
assurance
so
shell
want
us
to
listen
to
the
whole
thing
I
believe
before
they
make
that
live.
It
usually
takes
a
couple
of
weeks
once
you
submit
the
final
files.
James
Altucher:
Right.
I
want
to
stress
how
different
this
is
from
traditional
publishing.
When
you
finish
a
book
with
a
traditional
publisher,
it
can
sometimes
take
up
to
a
year
before
its
published.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
and
what
youre
paid
on
your
advance
is
sometimes
tied
to
the
publication
date
and
it
might
be
tied
to
different
formats.
So,
lets
say
a
third
of
it
on
signing.
A
third
is
on
hardback
publication
and
then
a
third
of
that
might
be
on
the
paperback
publication.
So,
it
could
be
two
years
before
you
get
the
last
third
of
your
advance
depending
on
how
it
was
structured.
James
Altucher:
And
like
you
said
then
the
agent
takes
a
cut,
then
the
government
takes
a
cut
and
meanwhile
Amazon
theyre
about
T
plus
60,
right.
So,
if
you
sell
something
in
June,
then
by
August
you
get
the
check
for
it.
Hugh
Howey:
Correct.
And
if
its
at
the
end
of
June,
its
just
a
little
over
a
month
before,
you
know,
everything
in
June
gets
paid
six
days
later,
so
yeah
its
pretty
I
think
publishers
are
having
to
respond
to
that.
Ive
already
seen
publishers
doing
sales
portals
where
you
can
see
monthly
sales
data
by
format.
Random
House
has
added
a
new
sales
portal
and
I
think
publishers
are
going
to
have
to
get
on
to
monthly
royalty
reports
and
direct
deposits
to
compete,
so
were
going
to
see
some
excellent
benefits
trickle
down
to
the
rest
of
the
publishing
world
because
of
what
these
digital
retailers
are
doing.
I
will
say,
you
know,
I
publish
on
KDP,
but
and
I
like
using
KDP
Select
which
is
a
90-day
exclusivity
period,
but
once
thats
over
I
also
publish
to
Kobo
and
DiBookstore
and
Nook
because
its
free
to
do
it.
You
might
as
well
get
as
many
formats
out
there
as
you
can.
James
Altucher:
Although
let
me
just
say
with
KDP
Select
you
don't
get
to
use
I-
books
or
Kobol
or
Barnes
and
Noble,
but
people
can
lend
your
books
out
and
Amazon
has
a
weird
way
of
paying.
They
have
like
a
pool
and
you
get
your
prorate
portion
of
the
pool
based
on
how
many
books
youve
lent
out.
That
can
actually
be
significant
money
if
people
are
lending
your
book
to
their
friends
and
stuff,
so
it
can
actually
work
out
to
be
better
results
than
I
mean
I'm
not
trying
to
sell
anything,
but
it
could
be
better
results
than
iBooks
or
Kobo
or
whatever.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
I
can
say
that
I
lost
money
by
going
out
of
Select
and
offering
my
book
in
other
outlets
when
I
was
doing
really
well
two
years
ago
because
there
werent
enough
sales
in
the
other
outlets
and
I
was
losing
the
lending
bonuses
and
the
extra
product
placement
from
Kindle
Select.
But
I
had
so
many
I
was
making
enough
to
make
a
comfortable
living
and
at
that
point
I
was
getting
emails
from
people
who
had
other
devices,
who
didn't
know
that
their
device
also
read
Kindle
books
or
they
didn't
know
how
to
do
that
and
so
I
kind
of
succumbed
to
the
reader
pressure
to
have
as
many
formats
out
there
as
possible,
but
youre
right
you
can
lose
money
by
offering
your
book
in
more
places
paradoxically.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
and
its
interesting
that
people
who,
like
for
instance
have
an
iPad
arent
always
aware
that
theres
a
Kindle
app
for
theres
a
Kindle
app
for
every
device
essentially.
But
I
think
that
over
time
people
will
realize
that
Kindle
dominates
the
universe,
so
theyll
just
switch
to
that
from
their
Nook
or
Kobo
or
whatever.
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
for
me
its
like
iTunes
with
my
music.
I
don't
want
to
have
my
library
spread
out
everywhere.
Even
on
my
PC
I
havent
purchasing
my
works
through
iTunes
which
I
find
to
be
the
best
website
for
discovery
of
new
songs
and
to
sample
and
listen
to
songs.
But
because
thats
where
I
started
buying
my
music
years
ago,
it
just
makes
sense
to
have
it
all
in
one
place.
I
can
log
into
any
device
and
access
my
entire
iTunes
library.
The
same
is
true
for
Amazon
and
their
e-books.
Once
you
start
buying
books
through
Amazon
it
doesnt
make
sense
to
have
them
everywhere
else.
You
know
you
have
all
your
so
you
really
get
locked
in
to
one
device
and
one
marketplace.
And
for
me
its
kind
of
a
no-brainer
which
one
to
use.
I
mean
the
Nook
is
theres
a
lot
of
talk
about
being
spun
off
from
the
physical
store.
I
like
what
Kobo
does
and
I
like
their
devices,
but
I
don't
know
that
its
as
stable
as
what
Amazon
has.
James
Altucher:
Well,
I'm
curious
now.
Your
coworker
from
the
bookstore,
he
kind
of
had
this
you
sort
of
alluded
to
he
was
looking
down
on
genre
fiction.
And
I
find
a
lot
of
people
look
down
on
just
self-publishing
in
general
and
not
as
much
now
as
lets
say
five
years
ago,
and
not
as
much
then
as
ten
years
earlier.
Theres
always
been
a
slight
stigma
or
it
used
to
be
bigger,
but
theres
a
stigma
against
self-publishing.
How
have
you
encountered
that?
Now
lets
start
moving
into
you
also
have
this
site
authorearnings.com
where
you
really
dive
down
on
the
numbers
of
how
much
self-published
authors
make
versus
traditionally
published
authors.
Also
theres
kind
of
the
quality
issue,
like,
does
traditional
publishing
really
produce
higher
quality
in
general
on
average?
Whats
some
of
your
discoveries
on
that?
Like
can
self-publishers
make
a
living
and
do
self-publishers
write
better
or
worse
books
according
to
the
readers?
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
self-published
authors
are
generating
the
same
quality
of
content
that
people
going
the
traditional
route
are
producing.
I
know
thats
probably
controversial
to
say,
but
the
difference
is
we
see
all
self-published
books.
People
that
choose
to
go
the
traditional
route;
we
don't
see
all
those
books.
We
only
see
the
ones
that
publishers
produce.
Thats
with
their
curation
and
their
gatekeeping
powers.
We
only
see
the
top
1
percent
of
books
that
go
the
traditional
route.
With
self-publishing
I
think
we
should
really
only
look
at
the
top
1
percent
of
self-
published
books.
That
ignores
the
what
people
would
consider
the
slush
file.
There
are
some
books
that
I
have
written
that
are
part
of
the
slush
file
that
are
not
my
best
works
and
that
I
wouldnt
want
to
include
in
the
top
1
percent
of
books.
So,
I
include
myself
in
that
category.
There
are
a
lot
of
traditionally
published
authors
who
not
all
of
their
books,
you
know,
they
all
have
a
couple
of
books
in
their
drawer
that
no
one
will
ever
see.
When
you
compare
the
two
top
1
percent
against
each
other
and
and
anyone
out
there
who
takes
writing
seriously
and
devotes
time
and
energy
into
it
and
takes
the
craft
seriously
they
can
get
themselves
into
the
top
1
percent.
You
have
a
lot
of
people
who
arent
trying
very
hard
that
youre
not
really
competing
against.
When
we
compare
those
two
tips
of
the
icebergs
together
which
is
what
we
do
when
we
look
at
the
top
50,000
rated
books
on
Amazon
for
instance,
what
we
see
is
that
readers
review
the
self-published
works
higher.
There
are
a
lot
of
reasons
why
that
might
be.
One
is
possibly
that
were
producing
more
of
the
kinds
of
works
that
readers
want.
Theres
a
bias
in
the
publishing
industry
to
publish
more
literary
works
and
the
kinds
of
things
that
the
people
who
work
in
publishing
enjoy,
but
that
would
be
like
promoting
opera
rather
than
promoting
cinema.
Just
because
you
have
high
tastes
that
does
not
influence
what
the
market
wants.
The
market
wants
cinema
not
opera.
Even
though
I
try
to
write
as
lyrically
as
possible
and
as
high
quality
prose
as
possible,
I'm
writing
the
types
of
stories
that
I
want
to
read
where
lots
of
exciting
things
happen
and
that
tends
to
be
what
self-publishing
provides
to
readers,
more
genre
fiction,
more
romance,
and
action
and
adventure,
and
science
fiction,
and
what
used
to
be
considered
pulp
We
can
denigrate
that
if
we
want,
but
I
mean
traditional
publishing
has
made
its
living
publishing
biographies
of
people
like
Snooki
and
whatever
they
think
will
sell.
For
some
reason
the
non-fiction
categories
with
self-help
and
religious
text
and
other
things,
they
are
willing
to
cater
to
reader
demand,
but
in
the
genre
works
it
just
does
not
seem
like
they
are
willing
to
output
as
many
works
a
year
as
readers
will
consume.
James
Altucher:
In
terms
of
money
now,
what
would
you
say
is
the
kind
of
comparison
between
the
top
1
percent
of
traditional
versus
self-publishing?
As
you
mentioned
youre
an
outlier,
but
can
one
make
a
living
from
self-publishing
in
your
opinion?
Hugh
Howey:
Yes,
you
can.
There
are
several
reasons
why
you
can.
One,
you
have
much
higher
royalty
rates
with
self-publishing.
Youre
talking
70
percent
for
digital
versus
12
and
a
half
percent
off
the
list
price.
So,
if
youre
self-published
you
make
70
percent
of
what
the
book
sells
for.
If
youre
traditionally
published
youre
gonna
make
around
12
and
a
half
percent
of
the
list
price.
People
will
say
that
70
percent
of
the
market
is
still
print
which
I
think
is
not
accurate,
but
even
if
that
is
true
that
70
percent
is
not
what
the
author
is
making.
The
author
might
make
12
percent
of
the
list
price.
The
retailer
and
the
publisher
make
more
on
the
sale
of
the
book
than
the
author
does.
So,
youre
not
giving
up
much
when
you
self-publish
on
the
print
side,
but
youre
gaining
a
lot
on
the
digital
side.
What
we
saw
when
we
compared
the
top
50,000
books
on
Amazon
were
the
self-published
books
were
earning
more
in
that
daily
snapshot
for
self-
published
authors
than
traditionally
published
authors
were
making.
James Altucher: Is that per author or all across the whole group?
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
thats
an
average
earnings
per
author.
And
then
we
also
broke
it
down
to
how
much
authors
were
making
in
each
bracket
and
from
the
outliers
which
were
dead
even
the
people
making
seven
figures
all
the
way
to
the
people
making
a
few
thousand
dollars
a
year
where
the
self-published
authors
vastly
outnumbered
the
traditionally
published
authors.
In
every
one
of
these
categories
self-published
authors
were
doing
better.
It
also
turns
out
that
Amazon
appears
to
be
making
more
money
from
self-published
authors
than
from
traditionally
published
books.
The
results
were
pretty
startling.
James
Altucher:
That
must
be
why
Amazon
has
so
little
friction
between,
you
know,
as
you
mentioned
all
of
their
services
are
free
to
the
writer.
Like
its
a
very
writer-friendly
environment.
Hugh
Howey:
Its
massive
because
when
we
think
that
70
percent
royalty
is
outrageous,
but
its
really
a
fair
rate
when
you
think
about
what
its
not
really
a
royalty,
its
a
distribution
agreement.
Were
providing
them
a
finished
product
that
they
only
have
to
list
and
put
on
sale
and
handle
the
transaction
side.
Theyre
not
doing
editorial.
Theyre
not
handling
cover
art.
Theyre
not
doing
print
distribution
and
all
that
stuff.
Thats
what
publishers
do
and
so
they
pay
the
author
royalty.
What
Amazon
is
paying
you
is
similar
to
what
a
bookstore
pays
a
publisher
to
carry
a
book.
At
my
bookstore
we
typically
got
a
40
to
45
percent
discount
off
of
a
books
retail
price
which
means
we
paid
55
to
60
percent
to
the
publisher
and
we
had
to
warehouse
and
staff
and
sell
the
physical
book.
So,
what
Amazons
doing
is
theyre
taking
a
finished
product
and
charging
30
percent
where
we
used
to
charge
40
percent
for
a
digital
book
versus
a
print
book,
so
its
a
very
fair
transaction.
Very
sustainable.
Its
a
higher
rate
than
theyre
paying
their
traditionally
published
books
where
they
might
only
make
10
to
20
percent
per
sale
of
the
book
and
I
think
it
might
be
a
lot
less
than
that.
James
Altucher:
Now
are
you
ever
disturbed
by
the
fact
that
self-published
authors
don't
make
it
into
the
bookstores
because,
for
instance,
at
least
for
most
self-published
authors
Amazon
doesnt
offer
the
return
policy
that
traditional
publishers
do.
Hugh
Howey:
You
can
make
it
into
bookstores
if
your
book
does
well
enough.
For
the
outliers
bookstores
will
carry
your
print-on-demand
books.
Ive
seen
this
personally
and
I
know
other
authors
who
arent
near,
you
know,
my
level
of
sales
that
are
seeing
their
books
show
up
in
bookstores
and
theyve
had
success
getting
their
books
into
Barnes
and
Noble.
I
have
a
friend
whos
done
several
signings
in
this
area
in
his
area
at
Barnes
and
Noble
and
have
been
very
well
supported
by
them.
I
think
this
will
change.
I
mean
were
very
early
in
this
process,
but
I
would
not
be
surprised
to
see
Create
Space
do
some
sort
of
pooled
marketing
where
they
would
have
sales
reps
and
view
their
Create
Space
books
as
their
own
in-house
books.
And
they
would
go
to
bookstores
with
a
catalog
and
say
Hey,
these
are
our
top
sellers.
This
is
the
book
were
most
excited
about
that
just
came
out.
These
are
the
books
we
think
you
should
carry.
And
basically
do
what
publishers
are
already
doing
and
offer
books
returnable
and
just
eat
the
cost.
I
don't
think
theyll
actually
return
the
books.
To
writers
I
don't
think
theyll
ding
their
accounts.
I'm
not
sure
how
theyll
work
that,
but
my
guess
is
they
can
be
profitable
and
eat
the
returns
the
way
publishers
do.
James
Altucher:
Well,
again
I
find
Amazon
to
be
incredibly
writer
friendly,
so
when
they
have
to
make
a
decision
thats
either
for
the
writer
or
against
the
writer,
they
usually
make
that
decision
for
the
writer
even
if
it
hurts
their
immediate
bottom
line
cause
theyre
looking
at
this
long
term.
Theyre
creating
a
long
term
eco
system
for
all
writers,
so
I
think
that
helps
the
writer.
Hugh
Howey:
Ive
seen
this
over
and
over
again
with
Amazon
where
and
we
read
their
clauses
and
we
read
what
their
lawyers
wrote
and
everyone
freaks
out,
but
when
you
deal
with
the
people
at
Amazon
they
make
commonsense
decisions
and
they
ignore
their
contracts
and
theyll
say
Look
this
is
what
makes
sense.
Every
time
theyve
had
to
make
a
decision
like
that
theyve
made
it
against
their
own
best
interest
and
for
the
writer
and
I'm
baffled
by
that
because
Ive
also
worked
with
traditional
publishers
and
it
doesnt
work
that
way.
Its
also
the
only
company
thats
ever
called
me
to
say
and
this
is
before
Ive
had
this
level
of
success
that
Ive
had,
but
called
and
said
Like
hey
what
can
we
do
better?
You
know
just
as
a
random
survey
sort
of
thing.
I
know
a
lot
of
authors
that
theyve
called
like
that
and
they
bring
in
to
look
at
new
products
and
systems
and
say
What
can
we
do
to
improve
this?
James
Altucher:
I
just
want
to
mention,
so
just
two
days
ago
I
was
at
Amazon
and
I
met
every
single
division
of
Kindle
and
Create
Space
and
so
on
and
I
was
astonished
how
humble
they
were
and
every
group
asking
What
can
we
do
better
to
help
you?
And
it
was
really
great
to
see
that
in
action.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
whats
amazing
is
self-published
authors
know
a
lot
about
marketing
and
a
lot
about
their
readership
and
I
think
this
is
something
about
the
New
York
publishers
should
really
tap
into.
They
should
really
contact
their
writes
and
say
Hey,
what
are
you
noticing?
What
can
we
do
better?
They
should
really
pool
those
resources.
Its
an
unbelievable
tool
at
their
disposal
and
Amazons
taking
advantage
of
that
and
other
publishers
should
as
well.
Theyre
already
doing
that
in
the
marketing
side.
When
you
sign
a
contract
with
a
publisher
theres
this
assumption
that
if
youre
with
a
big
publisher
theyre
gonna
handle
everything
for
you.
But
the
first
thing
theyll
ask
as
you
mentioned
earlier
is
How
big
is
your
social
media
platform?
How
many
Twitter
followers
do
you
have?
How
are
you
gonna
sell
your
book?
And
I
think
thatll
surprise
a
lot
of
aspiring
writers
when
they
get
that
first
contract
that
their
publisher
is
asking
them
what
theyre
gonna
do
to
sell
the
book.
But
thats
the
reality.
They
have
to
leverage
the
muscle
of
all
of
those
authors
in
their
stable
and
they
can
do
that
as
well
for
market
research
as
well
as
they
do
on
the
actual
sales
and
marketing
side.
James
Altucher:
Why
did
you
decide
to
do
this
authorearnings.com?
What
was
your
goal
with
that?
Cause
it
was
a
lot
of
work.
I
see
youve
put
a
lot
of
work
into
analyzing
the
data.
Hugh
Howey:
Yes,
its
been
a
lot
of
work
and
a
lot
of
money
hosting
the
site
and
getting
things
put
up
and
formatted.
My
motivation
has
been
the
same
for
the
last
several
years.
Ive
been
trying
to
do
what
I
can
with
my
agent
with
our
negotiations
with
publishers
to
make
changes
in
the
way
publishers
deal
with
manuscripts
and
with
the
authors.
I
think
we
should
have
limited
terms
of
license.
I
think
royalty
rates
should
be
better
for
digital
works.
Theres
no
reason
publishers
should
make
a
higher
profit
margin
off
an
e-book
that
they
make
off
a
hard
back.
Weve
seen
changes
in
every
other
entertainment
and
media
format
in
Hollywood
when
digital
streaming
became
a
revenue
stream
the
writers
had
to
strike
basically
to
get
what
was
a
fair
payment
for
their
work.
I
don't
think
thatll
happen
in
the
publishing
world
without
pressure
from
self-published
authors
because
right
now
publishers
just
don't
compete
with
one
another.
They
compete
on
the
size
of
advance
which
the
differences
there
are
small.
Theyll
go
to
auction
and
theyll
have
competition
there,
but
their
contracts
are
boilerplate
and
they
resemble
each
other
too
much.
The
reason
for
that
website,
you
know
an
author
contacted
me
with
the
first
bit
of
data
from
Amazon
that
anyone
had
ever
really
seen
in
a
very
clever
way
of
coming
up
with
that
data.
And
I
saw
this
as
being
really
hard
proof
of
what
Id
already
seen
anecdotally
for
years.
If
youre
in
the
trenches
this
matches
everything
that
youre
seeing
from
authors
on
both
sides
of
this
equation.
There
are
people
that
youve
never
heard
of
that
are
making
six
and
seven
figures
a
year
and
their
stories
are
popping
up
everywhere
and
its
hard
to
rationalize
until
you
see
this
data
and
you
realize
Oh
my
God,
self-published
authors
are
out
earning
traditionally
published
authors
on
Amazon.
James
Altucher:
Well,
I
think
whats
particularly
important
is
what
you
mentioned
earlier.
Its
not
just
that
theyre
making
it
on
one
book.
A
lot
of
times,
I
mean
I
know
some
authors
who
have
written
over
100
books
and
all
it
takes
is
like
a
$100.00
per
month
per
book,
and
if
youve
written
100
books,
youre
making
like
a
good
living
in
the
United
States.
Hugh
Howey:
Yes,
incredible.
Well,
you
know,
thats
one
of
the
things
that
we
were
concerned
about
when
we
saw
these
earnings.
We
have
the
author
names,
so
were
able
to
see
how
many
books
they
were
earning
across
and
what
their
total
earnings
were.
So,
one
of
the
things
that
we
looked
for
was
well
is
the
difference
in
earnings
only
because
theyre
publishing
more
books.
Well,
that
was
only
true
of
the
authors
earning
seven
figures.
In
every
other
bracket
self-
published
authors
were
earning
more
money
on
fewer
titles
than
traditionally
published
authors.
James
Altucher:
You
know
whats
interesting
also
and
your
numbers
probably
don't
cover
this
is
many
of
these
self-published
authors
are
in
charge
of
how
their
books
get
distributed
as
opposed
to
letting
the
publisher
be
in
charge
of
how
your
books
get
distributed.
So,
for
instance
for
me
I
often
will
bulk
buy
a
print
order
and
then
sell
through
an
email
list,
so
that
doesnt
get
reflected
at
all
in
terms
of
how
much
I'm
making
cause
I
can
put
together
bundles
of
my
books.
I
think
there
are
a
lot
of
creative
ways
that
self-published
authors
can
market
and
sell
and
distribute
their
books
which
is
also
interesting.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
and
you
can
give
books
away
if
you
want.
Through
Create
Space
I
can
get
copies
of
my
books
for
like
$3.00
or
$4.00
each
which
is
cheaper
than
some
other
marketing
materials
that
you
might,
you
know,
if
you
wanted
to
give
away
thumb
drives
or
other
doodads
at
a
conference.
Giving
away
the
book
itself
is
cheaper
than
a
lot
of
those
things.
I
know
people
who
they
get
really
fancy
business
cards
that
are
about
a
dollar
each.
Well,
I
can
print
a
novelette
for
a
dollar
and
hand
that
out.
So,
and
its
hard
to
do
that
through
a
publisher.
James
Altucher:
You
know
what
I
did
with
my
last
book;
I
had
all
67,000
words
printed
onto
a
t-shirt
so
you
could
actually
read
on
the
t-shirt
every
single
word.
Its
readable.
I
sometimes
give
that
away.
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
they
approached
me
at
AWP
and
wanted
to
do
that
with
one
of
my
works.
I
thought
that
was
brilliant.
I
couldn't
believe
you
can
print
that
much
onto
a
t-shirt,
but
they
showed
me
one.
I
was
dumbfounded.
James
Altucher:
One
of
the
things
I
wanted
to
do
when
I
was
up
at
Amazon
just
again
two
days
ago
was
allow
them
to
let
me
put
a
t-shirt
slot
on
the
title
page
instead
of
along
with
the
audible
paperback
art
cover,
also
a
t-shirt
cause
the
whole
books
there.
James
Altucher:
I
want
to
ask
you
also
switching
topics,
like
Ridley
Scott
calls
you
and
wants
to
buy
the
movie
rights
for
Wool.
What
happened?
How
excited
were
you?
Whens
the
movie
coming
out?
Hugh
Howey:
Well,
first
thing
I
did
was
change
my
pants
and
told
everybody
I
knew.
My
expectation
with
everything
to
do
with
my
writing
has
been
so
low
that
when
the
movie
talks
started
I
just
assumed
no
movie
would
ever
come
out
because
a
lot
of
stuff
gets
optioned,
very
few
things
get
made.
But
everything
thats
happened
since
then
I
just
feel
like
theyre
trying
to
get
my
hopes
up
before
they
dash
them
on
a
rock
somewhere.
Theyve
written
a
screenplay
and
weve
had
all
these
pre-production
meetings
and
everyone
seems
to
be
really
excited
about
it.
The
screenplay
is
brilliant.
I
still
tell
myself
itll
never
happen,
but.
Hugh
Howey:
No,
I
met
with
the
screenwriter.
Hes
from
London
and
they
flew
me
and
him
to
LA
and
we
spent
a
week
together
brainstorming
and
going
over
his
notes,
but
Ive
agreed
with
his
vision
from
the
beginning.
He
knows
what
the
heart
of
the
story
is
about
and
hes
captured
that
in
the
screenplay.
James
Altucher:
Have
you
met
with
Ridley
Scott
or
is
he
kind
of
hands
off
until
production?
Hugh
Howey:
Yeah,
I
think
he
would
just
show
up
to,
you
know,
if
the
movie
won
awards
thats
when
he
would
show
up
to
collect
all
those
and
put
them
in
his
trophy
case.
Hes
a
busy
guy
and
to
be
honest
the
movies
that
I
know
that
hes
working
on
theyre
a
lot
more
that
Id
rather
him
see
as
a
fan
make
before
Wool,
so
thats
one
of
the
reasons
Ill
be
surprised
if
this
gets
made.
James
Altucher:
Well,
are
any
actors
interested
yet?
How
far
along
are
you
in
the
process?
Hugh
Howey:
We
havent
done
the
casting
yet,
but
I
know
actress
who
have
read
the
book
who
have
contacted
me
privately
or
in
person
and
said
that
they
are
especially
female
actresses
who
are
dying
to
play
Juliette.
I
was
at
a
conference
in
Australia
and
some
of
the
media
stars
there
started
passing
the
book
around
and
there
was
a
lot
of
in
fighting
about
who
was
gonna
get
to
be
Juliette,
so
that
was
pretty
cool.
But
if
we
do
casting
that
will
probably
be
the
next
step
and
it
will
be
sometime
this
year.
James
Altucher:
I
know
you
keep
your
expectations
low,
but
lets
say
we
have
high
expectations,
when
do
you
say
a
movie
could
come
out?
Hugh
Howey:
My
guess
would
be
next
summer
if
they
not
this
upcoming
summer,
but
summer
of
2015.
If
they
cast
it
this
year
they
will
probably
be
filming
in
the
fall
and
wrapping
up
and
doing
post-production
in
the
spring
and
releasing
in
the
summer
of
2015.
But
thats
like
absolute
best
case
scenario.
Again
thats
not
my
expectation
at
all.
James
Altucher:
Hugh,
two,
three
years
ago
you
were
like
a
clerk
in
a
bookstore
shelving
books.
Now
were
talking
movie
next
year.
Youve
got,
I
don't
know,
15,
20
books
out.
You
are
continuing
to
write
obviously.
This
like
just
blows
the
mind.
Like
how
has
your
life
changed?
Did
you
buy
a
new
house?
Did
you
have
a
big
party?
Whats
going
on?
Hugh
Howey:
I
havent
had
a
big
party.
I
don't
have
that
big
of
a
social
network.
My
partying
has
been
online
with
Facebook,
but
my
wife
and
I
will
have
celebratory
glasses
of
wine
every
now
and
then.
We
had
to
buy
a
new
house
when
we
moved
from
North
Carolina
to
Florida.
My
wife
took
a
new
job
and
we
upgraded.
We
were
living
in
a
750
square
foot
house
in
North
Carolina
and
we
upgraded
to
a
900
square
foot
house
here
in
Florida.
Hugh
Howey:
So,
instead
of
bedrooms
that
are
like
10
feet
by
10
feet,
theyre
now
like
12
feet
by
12
feet
and
were
really
confused
what
to
do
with
all
the
extra
space.
Its
been
pretty
amazing.
Financially
its
a
weird
situation
where
I
don't
have
to
work
for
the
rest
of
my
life,
you
know,
I
can
write.
I
can
write
duds
and
flops
for
the
rest
of
my
life,
but
I
don't
think
about
it
that
way.
I'm
living
the
same
lifestyle
and
still
eat
the
same
cereal
every
morning
and
wear
the
same
t-
shirt
and
shorts
and
just
concentrate
on
the
writing
and
enjoying
life
which
was
my
philosophy
beforehand.
James
Altucher:
Well,
its
really
interesting
because
a
lot
of
people
always
ask
the
wrong
question
which
is
how
can
I
make
a
lot
of
money,
but
what
they
don't
realize
is
that
money
is
a
side
effect.
Like
if
youre
doing
something
really
well,
then
a)
youll
tend
to
love
what
youre
doing
as
opposed
to
the
other
way
around.
People
always
say
find
what
you
love
and
then
do
that,
but
I
find
if
you
do
something
really
well
like
writing
say,
youll
love
it
automatically
and
then
moneys
just
a
side
effect
of
that.
And
you
don't
really
have
to
change
your
lifestyle
cause
you
love
what
youre
doing
all
of
a
sudden
and
you
love
whats
happening
during
the
day.
You
don't
write
on
a
private
jet
or
anything,
you
write
in
your
home.
Hugh
Howey:
I
think
if
people
go
into
writing
and
we
see
this
with
the
people
who
claim
that
self-publishing
is
a
gold
rush.
Well,
there
are
a
lot
of
elements
of
traditional
publishing
that
have
the
same
mentality.
Theres
a
big
catastrophe
or
some
big
news
event
and
everyone
jumps
on
writing
and
pitching
that
book
immediately.
I
think
any
comparison
you
can
make
or
anything
you
can
say
about
one
of
these
routes
of
publishing,
you
can
say
about
the
other.
What
I
will
say
if
you
go
into
this
to
make
money,
I
just
don't
know
how
you
would
ever
be
happy
because
your
chances
of
making
a
lot
of
money
are
very
slim.
Yes,
theyre
better
as
a
self-published
author,
but
thats
not
saying
a
whole
lot
because
the
people
who
choose
to
traditionally
publish
which
means
they
choose
to
submit
to
agents,
that
doesnt
mean
they
get
their
book
on
an
end
cap
in
a
bookstore.
They
might
not
even
get
a
publishing
deal.
You
don't
get
to
choose
that.
You
just
get
to
choose
which
route
youre
gonna
go
and
that
might
mean
rejection
letters
from
agents
for
the
rest
of
your
life.
That
could
be
the
route
that
you
chose.
So,
yes
you
have
a
better
chance
of
making
money
self-published,
but
thats
only
because
your
chances
of
making
money
traditionally
published
are
so
woefully
slim.
Why
let
money
be
your
guide
if
your
chances
either
route
are
that
bad?
This
is
where
self-
publishing
really
wins,
not
on
the
monetary
side,
but
the
satisfaction
of
writing
a
story
that
you
believe
in
and
making
it
available
to
the
public
and
getting
just
one
reader
to
pick
that
book
up
and
enjoy
it,
thats
almost
a
guaranteed
outcome
if
you
dedicate
yourself
to
self-publishing.
By
the
time
you
write
five
or
six
completed
works,
you
will
have
found
one
reader
and
made
them
happy.
If
you
stick
to
that
as
your
goal
theres
no
way
you
can
lose.
Its
such
a
liberating
feeling
to
know
that
your
success
and
all
of
your
efforts
and
the
ownership
of
your
art
is
all
in
your
hands.
James
Altucher:
We
both
know
writers
who,
like,
take
Theresa
Ragan
as
an
example.
She
had
been
trying
to
traditionally
publish
for
a
decade
or
more
until
finally
she
went
the
self-publishing
route
and
now
just
through
self-publishing
shes
a
massive
bestseller
in
both
the
romance
and
thriller
categories.
Hugh
Howey:
Shes
made
a
lot
of
money
doing
something
that
she
loved
that
she
could
easily
have
given
up
on
the
other
way.
Thats
another
huge
advantage
is
self-
publishing
inspires
people
to
continue
writing.
Ive
got
really
good
friends
who
have
been
published
with
big
five
publishers
who
have
given
up
on
writing
because
of
how
their
careers
have
been
handled.
They
had
something
that
they
loved
doing
and
the
business
side
of
it
took
all
the
passion
out
of
it
for
them.
With
self-publishing,
again
its
a
paradox
because
you
think
youll
be
busier,
but
if
it
takes
me
two
months
to
write
a
novel,
it
takes
me
two
days
to
publish
it.
So,
when
you
think
of
all
the
stuff
you
have
to
learn
and
all
the
headaches
of
self-
publishing
you
can
do
it
in
a
weekend.
You
can
get
your
e-book,
your
print
book,
and
your
audible
book
set
up
and
formatted
and
ready
to
go
in
a
weekend.
Thats
not
a
lot
of
investment
and
time.
James
Altucher:
Its
been
really
amazing
for
me
as
well.
I
have
to
say
its
changed
my
life
and
this
is
after
having
traditionally
published.
You
know
I
published
with
Harper
Collins,
with
Penguin,
with
Wiley
five
different
books
and
self-publishing
has
been
amazing
for
me.
What
are
you
working
on
now?
Do
you
work
on
like
a
bunch
of
books
at
the
same
time
or
do
you
focus
on
one
at
a
time?
Whats
your
next
bunch
of
projects?
Hugh
Howey:
I
try
to
focus
on
one
at
a
time.
Right
now
I'm
moving
several
projects
forward
to
see
which
one
is
gonna
grab
my
attention.
I
just
published
really
three
works
this
year
already.
That
short
story
and
the
Kurt
Vonnegut
World
for
the
Kindle
Worlds
program
a
novel
called
Sand
which
has
been
a
bestseller,
and
then
an
anthology
with
John
Joseph
Adams
called
The
End
is
Nigh
where
I
edited
22
short
stories
and
contributed
one
of
those
and
helped
produce
self-publish
the
book.
We
just
got
that
out
a
couple
weeks
ago.
The
last
couple
of
weeks
Ive
spent
in
the
fifth
Molly
book
playing
around
and
also
starting
a
couple
of
new
novels
and
just
see
which
one
captures
my
attention.
Probably
in
the
next
week
or
two
Ill
pick
one
and
run
forward
with
that
for
a
couple
of
months
until
that
ones
finished.
James
Altucher:
Thats
great.
Hugh,
thank
you
so
much
for
coming
on
this
show.
I
really
think
youre
living
the
dream
and
congratulations
for
all
your
success.
Also,
I
think
youre
really
helping
move
forward
getting
rid
of
the
traditional
stigma
thats
been
associated
with
self-publishing
and
showing
people
that
this
is
a
viable
route
to
either
express
yourself
creatively
or
to
even
make
a
living
and
youve
been
doing
that
really
well.
Thanks
again
for
spending
the
time
and
coming
on
this
show.
Hugh Howey: Thanks James. Its an honor and Ill do it anytime man.
Aaron
Brabham:
Well
James,
that
was
an
excellent
interview.
Whats
the
one
big
takeaway
that
you
had?
James
Altucher:
Its
really
interesting
to
me
that
heres
a
guy
who
followed
his
dreams.
He
kept
his
expectations
low
and
then
he
blew
away
those
expectations.
Now
not
everyone
is
gonna
write
a
bestselling
novel
and
note
it
took
him
nine
novels
to
write
a
bestselling
novel.
But
I
guarantee
you
for
just
about
everyone
there
is
something
you
can
do
where
if
youre
persistent
and
you
keep,
you
know,
your
positive
expectations
high,
you
keep
your
optimism
high,
youre
going
to
find
success.
Youre
going
to
be
able
to
choose
yourself
and
find
freedom.
Everyone
wants
freedom
of
choice
in
their
lives.
Hugh
found
it
through
writing.
Other
people
find
it
through
building
apps.
Other
people
find
it
through
owning
a
franchise
or
investing
or
whatever,
but
theres
always
a
way.
If
you
do
what
you
do
well,
youll
end
up
doing
what
you
love
and
money
is
the
side
effect
of
that
and
freedom
is
the
side
effect
of
that.
So,
I
encourage
everybody
to
choose
this
route
really.
Aaron
Brabham:
Thats
great
James.
Its
a
theme
that
you
have
over
and
over
and
its
what
a
lot
of
your
guests
have
pretty
much
done
with
their
lives.
Theyve
all
kind
of
bottomed
out
at
some
point,
chose
themselves
and
it
pays
off,
but
it
is
scary.
One
of
my
favorite
sayings
I
ever
heard
was
when
one
door
closes,
another
one
opens,
but
sometimes
its
hell
in
the
hallway
and
its
good
to
go
to
the
new
door.
James
Altucher:
Thats
a
good
analogy
and
its
one
to
think
of
even
when
youre
being
persistent
in
the
same
area.
Just
because
some
agent
rejected
your
book,
you
know,
I
tried
to
write
fiction
20
years
ago
and
I
wrote
4
or
5
novels.
I
got
rejected
everywhere.
Then
I
started
publishing
non-fiction.
In
my
most
recent
book
Choose
Yourself
I
totally
self-
published.
I
used
the
exact
same
techniques
and
the
exact
same
companies
that
Hugh
talks
about
in
the
interview
and
my
book
the
day
it
was
published
hit
number
one
for
all
non-fiction
on
Amazon
over
every
other
book
in
the
world.
So,
its
possible
and
it
is
the
dream.
Everybodys
got
a
dream
and
I
encourage
everybody
to
pursue
it.
Aaron
Brabham:
Thats
awesome.
One
more
note
for
the
listeners
out
there.
You
know
we
talked
about
doing
the
Ask
Altucher
segment
where
its
a
daily
podcast
about
ten
minutes
long.
Weve
recorded
a
series
of
those.
Were
just
doing
the
technological
ends
of
it
right
now,
but
we
should
have
those
up
in
the
next
couple
of
days
or
so.
Its
a
chance
for
all
the
listeners
out
there
to
ask
you
a
question
or
go
to
your
Twitter
which
you
do
a
Q&A
every
Thursday.
What
is
it,
between
3:30
and
4:30?
I
forget
the
exact
time.
Aaron
Brabham:
3:30
and
4:30
and
your
Twitter
handle
is
@JamesAltucher
is
that
right?
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
and
people
ask
me
anything.
You
could
ask
me
about
relationships,
divorce,
hate,
anger,
anxiety,
fear,
startups.
People
ask
me
anything.
I
answer
on
the
spot.
But
now
Aaron,
now
that
were
doing
this
Ask
Altucher
well
be
able
to
also
take
kind
of
the
best
and
most
interesting
questions
and
expand
on
them
further.
Aaron
Brabham:
Thats
outstanding.
Also
you
can
also
email
James;
you
go
to
the
email
address
james@standsberryradio.com.
Thats
james@standsberryradio.com.
I
hand
select
these.
Ill
ask
you
one
a
day.
We
started
it.
Well
get
em
up
and
running
real
soon.
So,
please
we
encourage
everybody
to
do
that.
James,
another
phenomenal
podcast.
I
know
your
guest
lineup
that
you
have
coming
up.
Its
spectacular.
I'm
really
looking
forward
to
these
and
I
hope
everybody
else
just
hangs
in
there
and
keeps
listening.
James
Altucher:
Honestly,
I
can't
believe
some
of
these
people
said
yes
to
coming
on
the
podcasts,
some
of
the
guest
that
we
have
coming
up,
but
I'm
excited.
I'm
excited
to
talk
to
some
of
them
since
some
of
the
interviews
havent
happened
yet.
Aaron
Brabham:
Yeah,
absolutely.
All
right
James,
well
another
spectacular
show
and
well
talk
to
the
listeners
soon.
James
Altucher:
This
is
James
Altucher
with
the
James
Altucher
Show.
Im
very
excited
to
have
Steve
Scott
on
the
show.
Many
people
might
not
know
who
Steve
is,
but
youre
gonna
find
out
quickly
because
Im
gonna
ask
him
a
bunch
of
questions
that
will
show
you
what
an
incredible
job
this
guy
has
done
to
make
a
career
for
himself
out
of
nothing.
So,
Steve,
welcome
to
the
show.
Steve Scott: Well, thanks for having me on, James. A big fan.
James
Altucher:
Thank
you,
Steve.
And,
Steve,
Im
gonna
just
ask
you
straight
out.
How
many
books
have
you
published
on
Amazon?
James Altucher: Forty-one books. How much money did you make last quarter?
Steve
Scott:
The
last
quarter
Ive
made,
like
I
would
say
probably
$45,000,
but
this
month
Im
on
track
to
make
about
$40,000
just
from
this
month.
James
Altucher:
So
has
it
been
kind
of
like
an
upslope
ever
since
youve
started
the
strategy
that
were
going
to
totally
get
into,
but
I
just
wanna
know
if
its
been
a
general
upslope.
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
upslope,
but
its
___
some
dips.
I
would
say
as
good
as
this
month
was,
I
would
say
the
last
month
of
April,
that
was
definitely
a
downslope.
So
its
if
you
look
at
a
chart,
it
kind
of
goes
up
and
down,
up
and
down,
up
and
down,
but
every
time
it
goes
up,
it
goes
up
just
a
little
bit
more.
James
Altucher:
Thats
great.
So
when
you
say
41
books,
its
not
under
only
under
Steve
Scott.
Its
under
S.J.
Scott
as
well.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
and
I
have
another
whole
line
thats
about,
like,
childrens
animal
books,
but
those
kinda
tanked,
but
I
kinda
took
the
lessons
from
those
and
applied
them
kinda
what
Im
doing
now
with
the
habit
books.
James
Altucher:
Now,
so
Im
just
gonna
read
some
of
the
titles
of
some
of
your
books
because
it
seems
to
me
like
you
took
one
huge
book
and
divided
it
up
into,
like,
40
smaller
books,
but
its
an
ingenious
strategy.
So,
for
instance,
one
title
is
Make
Money
Online:
55
Ways
to
Make
Extra
Money
Fast
Using
Your
Computer.
Another
is
Internet
Lifestyle
Productivity:
Master
Time,
Increase
Profits,
Enjoy
Life.
Your
recent
ones,
which
actually
have
been
selling
better
than
mine,
let
me
find
them.
I
think
these
are
under
S.J.
Scott.
Youve
been
crushing
me.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
yeah.
Its
that
last
one
about
yeah,
Habit
Stacking:
97
Small
Life
Changes
that
Take
Five
Minutes
or
Less,
which
Ive
read,
by
the
way.
I
couldnt
remember
the
title
of
it
just
now,
but
I
have
read
the
book.
So
that
ones
been
doing
better
than
mine
this
month.
Also
youve
been
doing
very
well
with
Twenty-Three
Anti-
Procrastination
Habits:
How
to
Stop
Being
Lazy
and
Get
Results
in
Your
Life.
So
I
love
all
of
these
like,
heres
another
one,
Seventy
Healthy
Habits:
How
to
Eat
Better,
Feel
Great,
Get
More
Energy
and
Live
a
Healthy
Lifestyle.
Whos
not
gonna
read
that
book?
Steve
Scott:
I
hope
as
many
people
as
possible.
Yeah,
you
touched
on
the
first
one,
the
Fifty-Five
Ways
to
Make
Money
Online.
I
cringed
a
little
bit
when
you
read
that
one
off.
That
was
my
first
attempt
of
Kindle
publishing,
and
that
was
kinda
if
you
look
at,
like,
someones
first
blog
post,
thats
almost
how
it
kinda
related
to
the
first
feeble
attempt
of
someone
who
didnt
really
know
what
they
were
doing.
James
Altucher:
But
you
blow
away
a
lot
of
conventions
about
what
a
book
is.
Like,
you
know,
some
of
your
books
are
40
to
50
pages,
but
youll
you
know,
you
price
all
over
the
place.
Like,
youve
really
played
with
the
concept
of
what
is
a
book,
and
youve
used
Amazon
as
almost
a
place
to
distribute
these,
like,
I
dont
want
to
call
them
mini-books,
but
theyre
not
quite
large
blog
posts.
Youve
you
know,
youve
developed
your
own
genre,
and
so
lets
take
it
back
a
little
bit.
I
always
whenever
theres
a
superhero,
I
always
like
to
know
the
secret
origin.
So
what
were
you
doing
before
all
this?
Like,
where
did
you
come
from?
Steve
Scott:
Thats
actually
a
fairly
long
story,
but
Im
actually
kind
of
writing
an
e-mail
about
that
for
my
list.
But
actually,
Ill
try
and
think
in
the
Cliffs
Notes
version.
I
would
say
I
started
online
about
a
decade
ago.
Basically,
I
went
through
a
divorce,
I
had
to
move
from
where
my
ex-wife
lives
now
in
South
Carolina
back
home
to
New
Jersey,
and
at
the
time,
I
literally
James
Altucher:
Now,
wait,
wait.
Theres
a
lot
in
there.
What
were
you
doing
as
for
work
when
you
got
your
divorce?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
actually
lets
see,
I
was
in
the
military
before
that
and
I
had,
like,
your
typical
entry-level
job
at
Prentiss-Hall
as
a
marketing
assistant.
But
when
we
were
in
South
Carolina,
and
that
was
part
of
my
frustration
of
living
there
and
actually
probably
what
ultimately
led
to
divorce
is
just
kind
of
a
little
bit
of
self-hatred
in
who
I
was
as
a
person.
But
basically
James
Altucher:
So
were
you
guys
just
unhappy
and
you
werent
getting
along,
you
decided,
you
know
what,
lets
call
it
quits.
Did
you
have
any
kids
with
your
ex-wife?
Steve
Scott:
No,
I
didnt,
but
basically
I
would
say
its
mostly
my
fault.
I
do
like
to
take
the
blame
on
this
one
just
because
I
was
so
kinda
angry
at
myself
that
I
just
Im
sure
I
was
a
very
unpleasant
person
to
be
around,
and
that
factored
into
a
couple
other
things,
but
I
really
were
still
friends,
so
its
not
like
I
hold
a
grudge
and
I
hope
she
isnt
holding
grudges,
but
I
basically,
at
the
end
of
the
day,
I
had
to
move
home
and
basically
with
my
parents
and
James
Altucher:
Wow.
Where
in
New
Jersey?
Cause
when
I
moved
to
New
Jersey,
I
had
to
move
back
home
to
my
parents
so
where
in
New
Jersey?
Steve Scott: Red Bank, New Jersey. Its right in the Jersey Shore area.
James Altucher: Yeah, I know. I know where it is. Bon Jovi lives there.
Steve
Scott:
Yes,
he
does.
He
actually
I
saw
him
in
passing,
him
and
Bruce
Springsteen
a
couple
times
growing
up.
James
Altucher:
Cool.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
So
basically
I
had
to
move
home,
and
at
the
time,
from
like
2003
to
2004,
I
basically
had
internet
like,
I
had
a
couple
small
internet
web
sites,
so
basically
only
prospect
that
I
could
see
was
really
building
an
internet
business
and
eventually,
after
about
six
months,
I
managed
to
earn
enough
where
I
basically
got
to
move
out
of
my
parents
house,
but
it
was
definitely
touch-and-go
for
a
number
of
years
where
I
was
basically
trying
to
do
the
internet
thing,
but
also
I
just
had
a
whole
gamut
of
just
part-time
jobs
like
the
temporary
I
forget
what
thats
called,
but
those
temporary
employment
agencies
and
I
was
a
part-time
DJ,
so
basically
anything
I
could
do
to
make
money
and
hustle
on
the
side,
I
pretty
much
did
it,
but
I
kinda
___.
James Altucher: And what was the internet business that you started?
Steve
Scott:
At
the
time
Ive
had
a
whole
bunch
of
them,
but
at
the
time,
I
had
I
sold
Evil
Eye
jewelry
that
I
imported
from
Turkey,
and
I
sold
directly
through
eBay
and
on
the
eCommerce
web
site.
James
Altucher:
And
how
would
you
do
that?
So
youd
buy
this,
like,
kind
of
Evil
Eye
jewelry
from
Turkey.
Would
you
build
a
store
___?
How
would
you
then
up
the
price
on
eBay
to
justify,
you
know,
making
a
profit?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
they
werent
too
expensive
per
piece
of
jewelry.
They
were
only
about
a
buck
or
two,
and
on
eBay,
you
could
sell
them
for
$15
or
$16,
so
the
margins
were
actually
pretty
good.
And
eventually
someone
a
lot
smarter
than
me
came
on
eBay
and
basically
cornered
like
just
used
intelligent
marketing,
basically
priced
it
down
a
dollar
or
two,
and
what
I
didnt
realize
at
the
time
is
they
were
just
making
a
lot
of
money
on
the
back
end,
but
basically
trying
to
compete
with
this
person
would
just
eat
out
my
costs,
so
for
a
year
or
two,
I
had
just
an
eCommerce
web
site
for
people
just
searching
through
Google
traffic,
but
that
kind
of
kept
me
afloat
from
there,
but
I
would
say,
after
that,
it
was
one
series
of
kind
of
small
businesses
that
went
well
for
a
year
or
two
but
then
completely
died
out,
so
that
was
kind
of
my
life
for
a
while.
James
Altucher:
What
do
you
mean
he
was
making
money
on
the
back
end?
So
he
would
this
competitor
came
on,
dominated
the
market
and
underpriced
you,
and
then
you
said
he
made
money
on
the
back
end.
Whats
the
back
end?
Steve
Scott:
I
think,
and
this
is
kind
of
my
own
stupidity
and
naivet
is
I
didnt
really
analyze
what
he
was
doing
and
try
replicating.
I
just
gave
up.
But
basically
I
think
what
they
were
doing
was
they
were
basically
selling,
you
know,
a
bracelet
for,
like,
15
bucks
and
they
would
get
just
the
customer.
Thats
all
they
really
cared
about
was
they
would
just
basically
it
was
a
lead
loss.
They
would
just
get
the
eBay
campaign
would
pay
for
itself
and
then
they
would
have
the
customers
e-mail
and
potentially
mailing
address
and
they
would
send
follow-up,
Im
sure
some
types
of
mailers
and
theres
more
expensive
Evil
Eye
jewelry
that
you
could
price
anywhere
from,
like
50
to
60
bucks,
so
I
guess
they
try
upselling
them,
but
at
the
time,
I
didnt
take
the
time
to
really
analyze
what
theyre
doing,
see
how
I
could
have
done
it
myself.
I
just
gave
up
basically.
James
Altucher:
But,
Steve,
though,
it
sounds
like
you
learned
an
incredibly
important
lesson
because
I
see
this
all
over
your
web
site
now.
Building
an
e-mail
list,
getting
that
e-mail
address
so
that
you
can
later
market
to
and
upsell
to
that
person,
that
is
the
key
to
success
in
a
lot
of
these
types
of
businesses.
Steve
Scott:
Oh,
absolutely.
Like,
I
really
I
bang
that
drum
nonstop.
I
believe
now,
like,
getting
those
customers
and
getting
those
e-mail
addresses
is
really
the
most
important
thing
to
do
and
James
Altucher:
I
think
you
have
it
in
all
your
books
too,
like,
to
sign
up
for
your
list,
you
know,
give
me
your
e-mail
address.
Like,
people
can
click
right
on
through
your
books
to
your
e-mail
list.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
Im
definitely
not
subtle
about
it,
but
yeah,
I
feel
Id
almost
rather
not
make
money
initially
just
to
get
that
e-mail
address,
to
be
honest.
James
Altucher:
Well,
a
lot
of
your
books
are
priced
for
free,
so
I
can
tell
you
youre
not
making
money
on
them,
and
you
even
have
a
book
an
entire
book
titled
99
Cents
is
the
New
Free.
Its
45
pages.
You
sell
it,
obviously
for
99
cents.
How
do
you
get,
like,
an
entire
book
out
of
a
topic
like
that.
Steve
Scott:
If
I
remember
correctly,
I
wrote
sometimes
I
writ
these
things
so
fast
I
kinda
forget
what
I
write
about,
but
I
wrote
it,
lets
see,
right
after
I
came
back
from
Greece.
I
wrote
it
last
August,
but
basically
the
whole
premise
was
I
just
took
the
whole
analysis
of
what
people
think
was
conventional
wisdom
at
the
time
for
Kindle
publishing
that
you
just
release
a
book
for
free
for
five
days
and
you
just
get
a
flood
of
sales,
and
I
really
wasnt
seeing
any
evidence
of
that.
Instead,
I
would
launch
my
book
for
99
cents,
and
which
I
currently
do
now
pretty
successfully,
is
I
launch
a
book
at
whats
considered
a
pretty
low
price
point
for
99
cents.
I
get
a
lot
of
those
initial
sales,
and
then
from
those
initial
sales
and
review,
Amazon
kind
of
just
does
the
rest
of
the
legwork.
Once
they
see
that
little
bit
of,
hey,
this
book
has
some
marketability,
theres
an
audience,
theres
some
sales,
they
actually
do
a
lot
of
the
internal
sales
that
they
do
with,
you
know,
as
far
as
their
e-mail
campaigns
and
attaching
book
to
peoples
other
customers
also
bought.
I
guess
to
answer
your
question
is
I
really
just
kind
delved
really
into
the
to
what
I
felt
was
a
better
marketing
strategy,
which
is
launching
a
book
for
99
cents.
James
Altucher:
So
okay.
So
lets
take
a
step
back.
So
youve
done
all
these
businesses,
you
did
the
eBay
business.
It
worked
out
for
a
while.
You
moved
out
of
your
parents
house.
But
were
talking
it
seems
like
a
common
theme
was
bulk
businesses,
like
doing
quantity.
So
youve
had
all
these
different
activities
that
were
making
money
for
you
and,
with
that,
you
started
to
rebuild
your
life
in
New
Jersey.
What
happened
next?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
basically
I
eventually
did
stumble
on
not
stumble,
actually,
put
effort
into
it,
but
I
eventually
did
build
a
couple
reliable
internet
businesses,
and
it
goes
back
to
e-mail
marketing,
but
I
really
got
heavily
into
affiliated
marketing,
which
I
pretty
much
did
up
to
the
point
where
I
found
Kindle
publishing,
and
that
was
pretty
successful.
Like,
the
idea
you
build
an
e-mail
list
around
a
topic,
you
provide
free
content,
and
if
you
find
an
affiliate
offer,
you
promote
it
and
then
you
get
whats
basically
a
sales
commission.
So
James
Altucher:
So
let
me
ask
you.
Whats
like
an
example
a
very
specific
example
that
you
did?
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
I
kind
of
did
a
lot
of
exercise
and
dating
offers.
So
basically,
obviously
I
would
do
a
front
end
of
some
sort
of,
you
know,
how
to
lose
weight
in,
like
50
steps
or
something.
Im
trying
to
use
a
random
example.
And
basically
you
get
a
bunch
of
people
who
are
particularly
interested
in
that
topic,
and
I
would
basically
provide
content
to
them.
At
the
same
time,
I
would
find
a
couple
of
really
good
products
I
felt
were
valuable
to
the
end
user
and
Ill
promote
those.
It
was
kind
of
a
merging
of
good
content
with
also
some
pretty
aggressive
marketing.
Since
then,
Ive
kind
of
dialed
back
the
aggressive
marketing
angle,
or
at
least
what
Id
like
to
think
I
do.
James
Altucher:
And
were
those
good
businesses?
Like,
were
the
affiliate
fees
high
enough
that
they
pay
the
bills?
Steve
Scott:
Oh,
yeah.
Absolutely.
I
really
liked
it
but
I
also
felt
it
just
I
didnt
like
the
idea
of
absolutely
running
a
business
where
I
always
had
to
promote
the
latest
good
offer,
and
I
guess
you
can
make
the
argument
I
do
the
same
thing
with
Kindle
books,
but
I
felt
that
sometimes
Id
promote
something,
theyd
charge
70
bucks
and
sometimes
I
really
didnt
feel
like
it
was
really
worth
70
bucks
and
I
just
a
little
bit
of
guilt
was
involved
where
I
just
didnt
really
like
the
entire
business
I
was
involved
with.
I
feel
you
can
be
a
good,
ethical
affiliated
marketer,
but
its
also
kind
of
a
slippery
slope
sometimes.
James
Altucher:
And
I
know
were
covering
a
lot
of
stuff
really
quickly,
but
its
really
fascinating
to
me.
How
would
you
build
the
list?
Would
you
put
Google
ads
up
like
heres
a
free
report,
50
ways
to
lose
weight?
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
At
the
time,
it
was
a
lot
easier
to
kind
of
I
dont
want
to
use
the
word
gimmick,
but
its
easier
to
get
people
towards
your
e-mail
list
cause
basically
all
you
have
to
do
is
just
create
a
free
report,
a
squeeze
page,
which
is
basically
the
place
that
you
sell
your
book
for
free
or
not
sell,
but
basically
promote
your
book
for
free.
And
then
there
are
a
lot
of
sites
like
ezinearticles.com,
and
back
then
YouTube
was
really
easy.
You
just
create
free
content
on
all
these
sites
that
basically
drive
people
back
to
that
single
page.
So
really,
you
didnt
even
need
a
blog
or
any
sort
of
content
type
of
machine
that
we
have
now
with
podcasts,
YouTube
channels
or
blogging.
All
you
had
to
do
was
just
basically
drive
free
traffic
back
to
a
squeeze
page
and,
for
a
number
of
years,
that
worked.
Actually
its
still
stuff
I
havent
touched
in
five
years,
Im
still
kind
of
making
money
from
just
from
the
fact
it
ranks
well.
James
Altucher:
What
was
the
best
way
what
was
the
best
method
for
driving
traffic
back
to
the
squeeze
page?
Steve
Scott:
At
the
time,
it
was
ezinearticles.com,
but
basically
they
had
a
really
good
they
were
given
natural
ranking
preference
in
Google,
but
eventually
Google
basic
came
down
and
they
kinda
just
shut
down
that
kind
of
that
marketing
method,
basically.
If
you
want
to
post
articles
on
ezinearticles.com,
it
doesnt
really
do
anything
for
your
web
site
now,
but
back
then
you
could
write
an
article
and
it
could
rank
really
quickly
for
pretty
much
in-demand
key
word.
You
could
drive
a
lot
of
traffic
back
to
your
squeeze
page.
James
Altucher:
What
would
you
do
now
if
you
were
gonna
be
in
that
business?
Where
would
you
post?
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
thats
actually
part
of
the
problem.
I
would
say
probably
what
I
would
do
now
is
kinda
what
Im
currently
doing
but
just
a
different
revenue
stream,
but
I
would
basically
build
a
while
authority
niche
around
one
particular
topic
by
blogging,
what
you
do
podcasting,
YouTube
channels.
I
would
actually,
honestly,
I
would
write
Kindle
books.
Thats
probably
why
I
do
it
all
the
time
now
cause
I
feel
like
you
can
really
build
an
audience
just
by
writing
many
books.
And
actually,
I
did
agree
with
your
assessment
before.
I
do
consider
them
kind
of
mini-books.
James
Altucher:
Yeah.
So
okay,
so
lets
get
into
that.
So
when
was
your
first
when
did
you
write
your
first
Kindle
book?
James
Altucher:
Wow.
So,
okay.
And
that
was
called
what
I
said
before.
I
dont
even
remember
the
title
now.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
its
and
looking
back,
its
such
a
spammy
sounding
title,
but
its
Fifty-Five
Ways
to
Make
Money
Online
and
I
honestly
forget
the
subtitle,
but
that
was
basically
I
just
took
five
old
blog
posts,
I
basically
talked
about
the
different
revenue
streams
and
just
threw
it
into
a
Kindle
book
really,
honestly
not
knowing
what
I
was
doing.
Just
kind
of
threw
it
up
there
and
thought
it
might
be
a
good
traffic
generator
more
than
anything.
James
Altucher:
And,
you
know,
I
just
want
to
point
out
youre
self-published.
You
didnt
have
a
publisher
for
it
or
anything
cause
on
Kindle,
its
ridiculous
not
and
we
keep
saying
Kindle,
but
in
general
with
books,
its
ridiculous
to
have
a
publisher
thats
gonna
take
15
percent
thats
gonna
take
85
percent
of
the
profits
when
you
could
when
Amazon
allows
you
to
publish
a
book
and
theyre
the
biggest
publisher
in
the
world
and
they
only
take
30
percent
of
the
profits.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
absolutely.
No,
I
once
I
actually
discovered
what
I
have
with
Amazon,
I
was
just
amazed
at
what
the
opportunity
that
they
provide
to
authors,
or
even
bloggers.
Steve
Scott:
It
did
actually
it
did
terribly,
come
to
think
of
it.
I
was
about
to
say
it
did
well,
but
the
first
couple
months,
it
was
like
I
kinda
mentioned
before,
but
I
just
consider
it
more
of
a
traffic
generation
___.
I
really,
honestly,
truly
didnt
believe
it
would
actually
make
money.
So
I
threw
it
up
there
and
I
had
a
follow-up
book
a
couple
months
later,
and
I
remembered
that
I
had
the
first
book
in
what
they
call
KDP
Select,
and
at
the
time,
you
could
give
away
a
book
for
free
for
five
days
and
it
would
actually
kinda
trick
Amazon
into
saying,
hey,
its
a
good
book
and
then
suddenly
you
would
get
some
initial
sales.
Well,
I
put
the
first
book
under
KDP
Select
for
five
days,
and
when
I
looked
at
the
stats
afterwards,
it
was
selling,
you
know,
five
to
seven
copies
a
day,
which
was
10,
15
bucks.
Not
bad
at
all
for
something
that
was
more
of
an
afterthought,
and
thats
kinda
what
gave
me
the
kind
of
Kindle
bug
where
I
was
like,
well,
I
knew
the
first
two
books
really
werent
my
best
efforts.
What
if
I
actually
sat
down
and
wrote
a
detailed
book
instead
of
blog
posts,
just
write
a
detailed
book
about
specific
tactics
and
try
to
do
that
once
every
month.
James
Altucher:
Okay,
this
leads
to
two
questions.
What
is
authority?
Like
who
has
authority
in
anything?
Steve
Scott:
Thats
___
something
I
debate
with
myself.
I
would
like
to
think
of
myself
for
running,
I
would
like
to
think
of
myself
as
an
absolute
authority,
but
sometimes
I
dont
know
if
Id
really
even
want
to
get
into
that
just
because
its
the
sheer
volume
of
the
topic,
but
I
would
say
really
the
definition
for
me
is
at
least
you
know
more
than
what
most
people
do.
You
at
least
have
some
knowledge
and
or
you
at
least
have
some
passion
and
stuff
that
youve
tested
on
your
own
or
have
some
life
experience
in
that
particular
topic,
but
I
would
say
really
its
in
the
reader.
Theres
honestly
probably
people
that
buy
my
habit
books
that
probably
know
more
than
I
do,
but
I
would
like
to
think
that,
at
the
end
of
the
day,
I
know
a
little
bit
more
than
most
people.
James
Altucher:
Well,
youve
been
so
involved
in
at
least
online,
in
the
habits
of
not
only
weight
loss
and
health
and
running,
but
writing
is
a
huge
habit.
So,
you
know,
that
has,
over
time,
made
you
an
authority
on
all
these
different
topics,
but
let
me
ask
you
what
are
how
do
you
find
good
non-fiction
ideas?
You
have
several
books
about
how
to
find
good
non-fiction
ideas
for
books.
So
what
are
some
of
the
ideas?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
theres
two
answers.
Theres
what
I
do
for
myself
and
then
what
I
recommend.
What
I
do
for
myself
nowadays
is
really
just
kinda
what
Im
personally
interested
in.
Like,
for
instance,
a
couple
months
ago,
I
really
like
what
was
really
kind
of
an
annoying
thing
for
me
was
handling
e-mail
and
I
was
just
spending
hours
a
day
responding
to
e-mail
and
it
was
really
just
eating
into
my
life
and
my
free
time.
So
I
really
just
kinda
got
down
a
whole
system,
the
whole
inbox
zero
type
of
concept,
but
really
just
practice
it
for
myself
for
a
couple
months,
and
I
felt
just
the
experience
from
that
made
a
good
book.
Honestly,
that
one
doesnt
sell
very
well,
so
sometimes
my
book
ideas
arent
the
greatest,
but
for
me
it
just
always
comes
down
to
personal
experience.
But
what
I
recommend
is
just
basically
just
kind
of
reverse-engineering
the
Amazon
Marketplace.
I
would
say
start
out
by
looking
at
blogs,
forums,
basically
Yahoo!
answers,
even
ClickBank,
which
is
kind
of
a
depository
of
information
products.
Basically
just
look
at
whats
out
there
and
kinda
use
those
to
see
whats
selling
and
basically
just
write
down,
I
would
say,
50
ideas.
Literally
just
keep
on
writing
down
every
possible
idea
and
then
go
to
Amazon
and
just
keep
on
looking
at
different
books
and
seeing
how
theyre
ranking.
And
the
litmus
test
I
used
for
a
long
time
is
the
20,000
rule,
but
its
kinda
bumped
up
to
30,000
rule,
but
basically
if
you
look
at
the
Amazon
bestsellers
and
if
you
see
the
number
any
number
below
the
number
30,000,
that
means
it
sells
at
least
five
copies
a
day,
and
if
youre
selling
a
book
at
$2.99,
thats,
like,
10
bucks
a
day.
Its
not
a
huge
amount
of
money,
but
if
you
have
a
catalog
of
books
that
are
each
selling
10
bucks
a
day,
it
can
quickly
add
up.
So
I
kinda
like
to
use
a
combination
James
Altucher:
If
you
start
selling
300
books,
you
know,
now
you
have
40,
but
if
you
get
up
to,
like,
300
books,
thats
3,000
bucks
a
day.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
Its
like
I
know
obviously
the
math,
and
some
books
the
sales
will
drop
down
and
some
books
will
really
just
take
off
with
what
have
happened
with
a
couple
few,
but
I
like
the
idea
of
basically
just
five
sales
a
day
is
what
Im
happy
with
for
pretty
much
any
book
in
my
catalog.
James
Altucher:
And
so,
like
today,
for
instance,
I
dont
know
if
you
went
through
this
exercise
today,
but
what
would
be
some
ideas
in
ClickBank
or
on
Amazon
that
you
might
find
today
that
cause
you
also
seem
to
be
on
one
particular
category,
which
is,
like,
the
personal
improvement
category.
So,
like,
what
books
would
you
look
for
today
or
what
titles
would
you
think
about
today?
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
see,
this
is
a
hard
one
to
answer
because
I
actually
really
also
really
believe
in
the
idea
of
building
authority
on
a
platform
and
not
going,
hopping
from
idea
to
idea,
but
I
know
for
a
fact
that
Minecraft
is
a
big
popular
idea
right
now.
I
actually
dont
even
know
what
that
is;
its
like
some
type
of
video
game
or
something,
but
I
know
that
James Altucher: Yeah, a lot of kids play it. Its big on YouTube.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
I
know
people
play
that
all
the
time.
I
would
say
maybe
a
Candy
Crush
strategy
guide.
Wheat
Belly
Diet,
I
know
I
see
stuff
like
that
popping
up.
But
all
that
being
said,
I
really
dont
believe
in
the
idea
of
basically
finding
a
topic
just
because
its
selling
well
right
now
and
just
writing
a
book
about
that
because
honestly,
from
my
experience,
whats
been
the
driver
of
most
of
my
sales
is
building
a
whole
brand
around
a
catalog
of
books
with
the
idea
that,
hey,
if
someone
like
one
habit
book,
the
more
inclined
theyll
go
buy
a
second
habit
book,
a
third
book,
a
fourth
book,
a
fifth
book.
James
Altucher:
Youre
not
gonna
piggyback
trends,
for
instance.
Like,
if
Kim
Kardashian
is
trending
on
Twitter,
youre
not
gonna
write
a
book
about
Kim
Kardashian.
Steve
Scott:
No.
I
dont,
but
I
know
people
who
do,
and
Im
sure
they
do
it
successfully,
but
I
think
my
strategys
more
of
the
slow
play,
but
I
figure
that
ultimately
you
will
do
better,
have
a
more
successful
business
long-term
if
you
just
stick
to
one
topic,
and
basically
also
build
an
e-mail
list
around
it,
like
build
a
whole
authority
writing
about
one
type
of
Kindle
books.
James
Altucher:
So
I
feel
like
your
topics,
and
theyre
all
sort
of
related,
you
write
about
writing,
you
write
about
how
to
make
money
online,
you
write
about,
you
know,
healthy
habits
and,
you
know,
those
are
kind
of
your
main
things.
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
right
now,
and
I
would
like
to
think
that
down
the
road,
in
a
couple
years
when
I
start
a
family
and
stuff
like
that,
Ill
probably
come
out
with
a
parenting
habits
or
relationship
habits.
I
like
the
idea
of
any
type
of
habits
because,
honestly,
I
like
just
testing
new
things
in
my
life
and
just
seeing
if
I
can
improve
my
life
in
some
way
just
by
developing
small
new
little
routines.
James
Altucher:
And
so
okay,
so
the
third
book
came
out
and
when
did
you
start
seeing,
like,
money
trickle
in?
And
then
how
does
the
flow
work?
Like,
you
obviously,
you
know,
get
people
to
come
to
your
blog,
you
get
people
to
sign
up
to
your
list.
What
else
do
you
sell
off
of
that?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
let
me
try
answering
the
two
questions
separately.
The
first
one,
like,
the
third
ones
when
I
really
started
picking
things
started
picking
up.
That
was
September
2012.
And
then
I
wasnt
making
a
lot
of
money.
If
I
look
back,
I
think
I
was
making
a
couple
hundred
bucks
a
month
at
that
point.
But
then
I
came
out
with
the
fourth
and
fifth
and
sixth
books,
and
basically
those
were
all
basically
internet
business
books
just
cause
I
ran
a
business
for
about
eight
years
before
that,
so
I
kinda
knew
the
like,
how
to
get
a
lot
of
traffic.
I
knew
how
to
basically,
after
writing
a
couple
books,
I
knew
how
to
write
a
book
pretty
fast.
I
knew
about
how
to
make
a
little
bit
of
money
from
YouTube,
so
I
basically
took
all
these
little
small
little
niche
strategies
I
kinda
knew
and
just
wrote
whole
books
about
them
and
just
based
them
off
my
own
experiences.
And
I
would
say
by
December
2012,
I
was
making
a
couple
thousand
a
month.
And
then,
from
there,
its
been
progressively
getting
a
little
bit
better,
but
kind
of
like
I
mentioned
before,
some
months
it
would
go
down
a
little
bit.
James
Altucher:
So
from
September
2012
to
December
2012,
you
went
from
making
a
few
hundred
to
a
few
thousand.
Is
that
because
you
wrote
a
whole
bunch
of
more
books
or,
like
what
did
you
do?
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
would
say
really
my
only
major
strategy,
and
let
me
also
preface
this
one
quick
thing,
but
my
major
strategy
was
basically
write
a
book
every
three
weeks,
and
that
just
I
stuck
to
that
schedule
pretty
well
for,
I
would
say
at
least
four
months.
But
what
else,
kind
of
the
one
benefit
I
had
that,
unfortunately
a
lot
of
people
dont
have,
is
I
was
blogging
for
a
couple
years
up
to
that
point
about
internet
business,
so
I
did
have
a
collection
of
e-mail
subscribers.
And
at
the
time,
I
basic
my
strategy
was
just
release
a
book
for
free
for
a
couple
days
and
just
basically
like,
hey,
the
books
free,
guys.
Please
just
do
me
a
favor,
go
review
it.
And
I
would
get
30,
40
reviews
pretty
much
overnight
just
by
giving
away
a
book
for
free,
and
I
kinda
milked
that
strategy
for
all
its
worth,
but
kinda
what
I
mentioned
before,
the
giving
away
a
book
for
free,
Ive
moved
away
from
that
strategy.
James
Altucher:
Right,
right.
So
okay,
so
were
at
the
beginning
of
2013.
How
many
books
do
you
have
out
at
that
point?
Steve
Scott:
Im
trying
to
remember.
At
that
point,
I
think
I
was
at
seven
or
eight.
James Altucher: And what was your most successful one at that point?
Steve
Scott:
Mine
was
kinda
the
metabook
about
how
to
write
a
book
in
21
days.
So
basically
I
wrote
a
book
about
writing
a
book,
and
that
one
did
quite
well
for
a
while.
Steve
Scott:
Oh,
thanks.
Actually
and
that
was
actually
the
moment
where
I
found
my
e-cover
designer.
Ive
really
felt
that
really
was
a
huge
made
a
huge
difference
in
my
business
cause
I
feel
that
he
has
a
particular
good
eye
for
creating
really
awesome
e-
covers.
As
a
side
note,
if
anyone
wants
the
name
of
this
guy,
just
e-mail
me
and
I
can
supply
his
name.
But,
yeah,
I
felt
like
he
did
a
really
good
job
with
that
particular
e-cover,
and
since
then,
Ive
really
felt
Ive
been
kinda
having
a
visual
representation
of
my
brand
just
by
what
he
designs.
James
Altucher:
Why
are
you
so
open
with,
like
youre
totally
giving
away
your
whole
strategy
and
now
your
cover
guy?
Like,
anybody
can
wake
up
tomorrow,
call
your
cover
guy
and
write,
you
know,
ten
steps
to
writing
the
best
non-fiction
book
in
the
world.
Steve
Scott:
Ive
had
people
rip
me
off,
but
Id
be
honest.
I
feel
that
most
people
will
do
themselves
a
disservice
if
all
theyre
doing
is
just
ripping
people
off
and,
to
be
honest,
my
strategy
involves
just
a
lot
of
hard
work,
and
most
people
dont
really
want
to
do
the
hard
work,
and
Im
sure
they
could
shortcut
a
couple
of
my
suggestions,
but
Ive
honestly
the
people
I
look
up
to
online,
like
the
Pat
Flynns
of
the
world,
the
people
that
actually
are
the
most
open
about
everything
that
they
do,
and
I
feel
that
long-term-wise,
they
do
the
best,
so
it
only
makes
sense
to
model
them
and
to
really
just
be
honest
about
what
works.
And
a
lot
of
times,
Im
honest
about
what
doesnt
work
for
me.
James
Altucher:
Right.
So
okay,
so
youre
at
several
thousand
a
month,
you
know,
in
early
2013
and
youre
writing
a
book
every
three
weeks.
Youve
stuck
to
that,
I
think,
pretty
much
through
now.
Like,
I
see
a
new
book
from
you
every
three
or
four
weeks.
Whats
been
working?
How
has
the
strategy
evolved?
Whats
going
on?
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
about
so
Id
say
right
around
February
or
March
13,
I
would
keep
same
thing,
internet
business
books
Id
keep
on
releasing.
And
I
got
three
or
four
negative
reviews,
and
they
really
got
to
me,
and
one
of
them,
basically
it
was
the
same
theme.
This
guy,
all
he
does
is
make
money
online
by
teaching
people
to
make
money
online.
And,
yeah,
I
could
definitely
say
I
was
doing
that
at
the
time,
and
I
was
so
convinced
that
I
knew
what
I
was
talking
about.
I
was
convinced
I
could
go
into
any
market,
write
about
it
consistently
in
that
market
and
still
turn
a
profit.
And
basically,
I
just
said
challenge
accepted.
Im
gonna
find
a
market
that
Im
really
interested
and
just
write
books
about
that.
So
I
went
through
a
month
or
two
of
trying
to
figure
out
what
I
was
gonna
write
about
and
I
chose
just
the
habits
market
cause
I
felt
that,
at
the
end
of
the
day,
everything
I
learned
in
the
past
decade
since
kinda
my
lowest
point
of
my
life
had
to
do
with
habits.
So
I
just
sat
down,
same
thing
and
just
wrote
about
small
little
habits
that
either
Ive
learned
or
basically
that
I
could
at
least
teach
someone
just
from
my
own
experiences.
And
if
I
didnt
know
that
topic,
I
would
just
go
out
and
test
it
for
a
couple
months
and
then
write
about
it.
But
I
just
felt
like
the
idea
there
that
I
felt
that
you
really
could
just
build
a
brand
on
Kindle
just
by
writing
about
one
specific
topic,
and
the
harder
you
work
and
the
more
books
you
produce,
the
better
of
a
business
youll
have.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
and
I
see
that,
you
know,
you
developed
another
persona,
the
S.J.
Scott
persona,
and
the
last
three
books
are
Habit
Stacking,
Twenty-Three
Anti-
Procrastination
Habits
and
Writing
Habit
Mastery:
How
to
Write
2,000
Words
a
Day
and
Forever
Cure
Writers
Block.
So
it
seems
like
you
almost
use
that
persona
to
really
kind
of
do
the
habits,
but
it
still
revolves
around
internet
businesses
and
writing
and
so
on.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
its
still
like,
I
started
habits
with
the
glorious
idea
that
only
write
about
specific
habits,
but
at
the
end
of
the
day,
I
realized
I
know
a
lot
about,
like,
productivity
and
time
management,
so
fortunately
or
unfortunately,
Im
not
too
sure
which
way
you
look
at
it,
it
would
I
just
a
lot
of
that
time
management
stuff
definitely
creeps
into
my
books
cause
Im
like
a
basically
a
time
management
junkie.
James
Altucher:
Well,
like,
tell
me
about
your
typical
day
so
I
understand
what
that
means.
Steve
Scott:
Sure.
Basically
I
get
up
every
morning
and
I
do
my
one
thing.
Thats
basically
for
me,
its
whatever
is
the
thing
that
either
could
be
the
biggest
growth
of
my
business
or
the
one
thing
Im
working
or
the
one
challenge
Im
having.
To
give
two
examples,
writing
was
my
basically
my
first
thing.
I
would
do
writing
before
I
opened
up
my
e-mail,
look
at
Facebook
or
anything.
I
would
just
sit
down
and
write
for
two
or
three
hours.
And
right
now,
honestly,
my
biggest
challenge
is
Im
having
trouble
with
recording
video.
Im
trying
to
actually
create
an
extensive
video
course,
so
Im
just
not
really
a
natural
presenter.
I
just
dont
really
Im
not
comfortable
talking
information.
So
I
know
if
I
dont
do
it
right
away,
Ill
tend
to
procrastinate
on,
so
I
force
myself
to
do
video
for
the
first
couple
hours
a
day.
And
then
I
also
like
to
kinda
the
most
important
things
that
Leah
___
talks
about
is
basically
you
write
down
three
things
that
could
be
like
three
things
that
basically
are
the
most
important
part
of
your
day.
So
I
do
those,
like,
those
three
things
in
the
morning.
So
the
one
thing
is
part
of
that,
and
I
find
two
other
small
projects
that
are
really
have
the
biggest
benefit
to
my
life,
so
I
do
those
three
things
right
away
before
anything
else.
And
then
the
rest
of
the
day,
Im
just
kind
of
closing
loops.
Im
answering
e-mails,
Im
doing
small
little
projects,
but
a
lot
of
stuff
that
doesnt
take
a
lot
of
high
energy
or
a
lot
of,
like,
mental
brain
power.
I
tend
to
do
the
hot
and
heavy
stuff
right
in
the
morning
and
then
just
kinda
the
lower-energy
stuff
in
the
afternoon
and
then
I
got
to
Starbucks
and
kinda
putter
around
for
the
rest
of
the
day,
exercise,
that
sort
of
thing.
James Altucher: Thats a good life. Well, what did you write about today?
Steve
Scott:
I
wrote,
actually
I
did
those
videos
pretty
much
all
this
morning,
and
today
I
wrote
actually
thats
why
I
was
thinking
about
the
decade
ago.
I
basically
wrote
an
e-mail
that
Im
gonna
use
as
an
autoresponder
about
how
habits
saved
my
life.
So
its
basically
I
realized
that
recently
my
e-mail
sequence
really
doesnt
have
much
personality
behind
it,
so
I
took
kind
of
a
long
heartfelt
explanation
of
really
what
I
feel
passionate
about
habits
and
really
what
I
was
like
ten
years
ago,
which
I
was
basically
a
loser,
so
kind
of
the
evolution
of
a
few
habits
that
really
helped
me
along
the
way.
James
Altucher:
Can
I
tell
you
from
my
own
personal
experience
and
also
Ive
read
quite
a
few
of
your
things,
and
all
of
your
stuffs
great.
I
really
am
impressed,
but
when
you
start
telling
your
personal
stories,
your
reader
interest
and
loyalty
is
going
to
skyrocket
because
thats
what
people
want
to
know.
Its
like
when
I
was
a
kid,
you
know,
I
would
read
about
a
Superhero,
but
my
favorite
comic
book
was
Secret
Origins,
which
tells
the
___
behind
every
Superhero.
And
thats
people
wanna
know
this
is
where
Im
at,
how
can
I
relate
to
what
this
author
is
saying,
and
if
you
give
a
personal
story,
they
can
relate
and
then
they
really
take
off
with
you.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
and
to
be
perfectly
honest,
I
know
all
this
stuff,
but
Im
like
sometimes
I
have
problems
with
my
confidence
and
sometimes
I
sit
and
as
Im
writing
Im
like,
well,
people
really
dont
want
to
hear
about,
like,
all
a
bunch
of
stories
that
I
have.
Theyd
rather
just
get
the
meat
of
the
topic,
and
I
do
believe
in
good,
like,
step-by-step
strategies,
but
sometimes
I
tend
to
leave
the
personality
out
of
that,
and
thats
something
I
really
need
to
work
on
and
try
to
make
a
concerted
effort,
but
youre
absolutely
right.
James
Altucher:
You
know,
my
problem
is
Im
the
reverse.
I
actually
think
no
one
is
gonna
be
interested
in
anything
I
say
unless
I
tell
my
personal
story,
and
its
I
hate
to
bring
Buddhism
into
this,
but
even
Buddha
said
dont
try
any
of
my
advice.
This
is
just
what
works
for
me.
And
you
can
then
take
it
or
leave
it.
It
works
for
me.
And
so
he
started
from
the
personal
story.
I
mean,
the
guy
obviously
was
an
expert
marketer
for
his
day
and
age,
you
know,
500
B.C.,
and
he
did
it
by
telling
his
own
personal
story,
and
thats
what
works
now
too.
Steve
Scott:
No,
I
feel
your
absolutely
right.
Ive
read
your
Choose
Yourself
and
Ive
really
enjoyed
all
the
personal
stuff
and
all
the
especially
all
the
struggles
that
you
talked
about.
It
really
does
engage
the
reader,
and
I
should
know
better.
I
should
definitely
include
some
of
the
stuff
in
my
books.
James Altucher: So out of your 41 books, whats done the best and why?
Steve
Scott:
The
one
recently,
the
Habit
Stacking,
thats
been
in
the
Top
100
or
hovering
around
the
Top
100
for
a
couple
weeks
now,
so
its
done
exceptionally
well
for
me.
To
be
honest,
why,
Ive
actually
been
trying
to
reverse-engineer
that
over
the
last
week
or
so.
I
would
say
maybe
the
cover.
It
has
a
catchy
cover.
I
feel
that
it
actually
teaches
a
concept
that
probably
no
ones
ever
talked
about
before,
and
Im
sure,
like,
the
97
Small
Changes,
it
basically
speaks
as
a
couple
quick
things
that
people
can
add
to
their
life
with
a
whole
new
way
of
doing
it
without
taking
up
too
much
time.
I
guess
just
the
marketing
presentation
behind
it
is
pretty
solid
and
James
Altucher:
Well,
Ill
tell
you
my
opinion,
because
Ive
seen
this
in
a
lot
of
places.
Its
the
subtitle,
and
its
the
end
of
the
subtitle
where
you
say
these
small
life
changes
take
five
minutes
or
less.
Like,
everybody
wants
to
work
the
four-hour
workweek
or
they
want
to
have
they
want
to
make
changes
that
are
gonna
take
five
minutes
or
less
or
they
want
to
be
more
productive
without
doing
anything
new.
Like,
I
just
see
this
in
general.
And
not
because
people
are
lazy;
theyre
not,
but
I
think
people
dont
know
they
want
to
figure
out
the
things
that
are
out
there
that
really
are
possible
to
learn
in
five
minutes
or
less
or
they
want
to
learn
how
to
spend
36
hours
a
week
doing
things
that
they
enjoy
and
only
work
for
four
hours.
So
they
know
these
things
are
possible,
but
they
dont
know
they
wanna
know
the
path
that
gets
them
there.
And
so
I
think
when
you
throw
that
time
element
in,
Ill
bet
you
if
you
look
back,
your
time
the
ones
where
you
give
specific
times
do
the
best.
Steve
Scott:
You
know,
to
be
honest
with
you,
youre
probably
right
because
I
know
the
21
Write
a
Book
in
21
Days,
that
was
another
one
that
sold
really
well
for
a
long
time
and
yeah,
I
guess
it
speaks
to
basically
giving
people
small
wins
or
something
that
can
immediately
apply
into
the
life,
and
Im
a
firm
believer
in
hard
work
and
diligence,
but
sometimes
its
hard
to
market
hard
work
and
diligence.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
so
okay,
so
all
together
now,
youve
got
41
books.
This
Habit
Stacking
ones
gonna
do
great
for
you
this
month.
Obviously
youll
make
a
few
thousand
just
from
that,
and
Im
sure
like
Twenty-Three
Anti-Procrastination
Habits,
all
these
books
probably
are
good,
consistent
earners.
What
do
you
then
do
to
supplement
income
further?
Steve
Scott:
To
be
perfectly
honest,
right
now
Im,
besides
I
still
make
some
decent
money
from
___
marketing
firm,
just
stuff
Ive
done
years
ago,
but
really
I
would
say
80
percent
of
my
income
is
just
Kindle
right
now.
I
dont
really
I
am
in
the
process
of
putting
together
information
to
talk
about
my
experiences
with
Kindle,
but
for
now,
its
really
Im
just
making
pretty
much
everything
from
that
one
platform.
James
Altucher:
And
so
youre
earning
about
almost
1,000
on
average,
almost
$1,000
a
book
from
Kindle.
Now,
I
know
some
are
much
less
and
some
are
much
more,
but
this
seems
to
be
the
average.
And
I
bet
you
that
average
will
hold
on
as
you
write
more
books.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
feel
that
there
definitely
is
an
80-20
here
that
I
would
say
theres
a
couple
here
that
do
exceptionally
well,
and
theres
a
couple
that
really
dont
sell
more
than
one
or
two
copies
a
month,
so
its
and
sometimes
it
really
just
takes
you
publishing
continuously
to
really
find
out
what
those
slam
dunks
are.
James
Altucher:
You
know
what
this
reminds
me
of,
and
gosh,
I
should
remember
the
name
right
off
the
top
of
my
head,
but
the
guy
in
the
1920s
who
wrote,
like,
1,000
blue
books.
Like,
they
were
all
the
books
were
blue
and
they
had,
like,
all
these
titles,
kinda
like
yours
like,
you
know,
how
to
avoid
procrastination,
how
to
they
would
even
have,
like
you
know,
he
would
divide
it
into
lots
of
categories.
So
he
had
a
biography
category,
so
like
a
biography
of,
you
know,
Napoleon.
Or
he
would
have
a
romantic
category,
so
like,
how
to
kiss
better
or
how
to,
you
know,
pick
up
a
woman
or
whatever.
And
he
literally,
I
think
he
had
about
1,000
books.
And
all
together,
he
sold
over
100
million
copies
of
these
blue
books,
and
each
one
was
a
nickel.
So
at
the
time,
he
was
making
a
small
profit
on
each
one,
but
if
a
book
sold
less
than
10,000
a
month,
he
would
start
to
drop
it
from
the
catalog.
Like,
he
was
very
disciplined,
and
he
would
do
a
lot
of
testing.
Like,
he
would
change
the
titles.
So
he
would
have
some
obscure
title
that
would
sell
nothing,
and
then
he
would
change
it
to,
you
know,
how
to
have
a
blonde
mistress,
and
suddenly
that
would
skyrocket
to
30,000
books
a
month.
And
he
would
do
lots
of
testing.
So
Im
just
curious
if
you
do
any
testing
on
your
titles
or
Steve
Scott:
I
should.
I
think
of
the
old
thing
of
how
to
win
friends
and
influence
people.
I
forgot
what
the
original
title
was,
but
I
know
they
changed
it
to
that
and
almost
overnight,
the
sales
side
started
skyrocketing,
but
yeah,
I
do
Im
kind
of
ghetto
when
it
comes
to
my
testing.
I
guess
I
should
be
a
little
bit
better
about
it,
but
I
do
run
it
by
a
couple
people.
Im
in
a
Facebook
group
with
Kindle
publishers,
so
if
Im
really
struggling
with
a
title,
Ill
throw
a
couple
up
there.
I
do
recommend
a
couple
services.
I
think
theres
Pickfu.com,
P-I-C-K-F-U,
that
you
can
basically
get
50
different
people
that
basically
vote
on
a
particular
title
choice.
And
theres
also
basically
___,
Muturk.com.
Basically
both
sites
you
can
just
poll
a
lot
of
people
in
a
short
amount
of
time,
just
basically
get
people
to
pick
your
title.
I
have
been
meaning
to
try
those.
I
just
havent
really,
like,
had
a
chance
yet,
but
I
do
once
in
a
while
will
throw
a
different
e-cover
if
I
feel
books
are
slipping
that
used
to
do
pretty
well.
But
for
the
most
part,
Ive
really
tried
to
do
all
the
heavy
lifting
before
I
even
launch
my
book.
James
Altucher:
Have
you
also
tried
rewriting
a
book
enough
that
Amazon
then
sends
out
an
automated
e-mail
saying
this
book
has
changed
so
completely,
you
might
want
to
buy
it
again?
Steve
Scott:
I
have
not.
I
know
people
who
do
that,
but
it
seems
that
strategy
always
kind
of,
to
me,
seems
a
little
bit
dodgy
like,
I
guess
if
you
really
do
a
good
job
of
rewriting
it,
but
Id
almost
rather
take
the
book
down,
just
rewrite
the
whole
thing
and
just
build
a
whole
new
audience
behind
the
book
and
maybe
improve
it.
There
are
a
couple
books
that
are
on
my
list
to
basically
do
a
whole
new
version
of.
James
Altucher:
So
I
see.
So
right
now,
you
make
money
off
the
books,
but
the
books
drive
an
e-mail
list,
but
the
e-mail
list,
its
not
like
youre
upselling
any
other
products.
Youre
just
when
the
next
books
released,
youll
inform
or
e-mail
us,
hey,
Ive
got
a
new
book
out.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
Really
its
like
the
whole
jab,
jab,
jab,
right
hook
that
Gary
Vaynerchuk
talks
about
and
what
James Altucher: Yeah, and Garys been on the show here as well.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
think
I
did
hear
it.
I
do
remember
hearing
that
episode.
I
really
like
his
whole
idea
of
basically
give,
give,
give,
give
then
ask.
And
when
I
really
looked
at
the
numbers,
and
Ive
tried
promoting
a
few
things
on
the
e-mail
list,
but
they
really
didnt
go
anywhere,
I
recently
realized
that
basically
I
dont
really
need
to
do
anything
else
but
provide
a
couple
of
really
good
solid
e-mails,
send
them
some
content,
and
then
when
I
have
a
new
book,
just
basically
beg
and
plead
as
much
as
I
can
for
people
to
go
buy
it
and
leave
a
review,
and
thats
all
I
really
need
to
do
for
right
now
just
to
drive
sales.
Just
as
long
as
I
get
as
many
sales
as
possible
when
that
book
launches.
It
tends
to
just
drive,
Amazon
tends
to
pick
up
the
rest
of
the
slack
and
does
a
lot
of
marketing
for
me.
James
Altucher:
Whats
your
ratio
of,
like,
lets
say
free
content
that
you
send
via
your
e-mails
to
the
begging
e-mails?
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say,
for
now,
its
about
75
percent
free
content,
25
percent
begging,
but
that
Im
definitely
trying
to
actually
increase
the
number
of
free
content,
and
thats
the
whole
idea
behind
that
story
is
Im
trying
to
actually
become
more
personable
and
more
engaging
on
the
individual
e-mail
lists
and
maybe
have
five
to
seven
e-mails
that
really
kinda
speak
to
the
individual
reader,
and
hopefully
when
it
comes
time
to
ask
for
something,
theyll
know
me
better
as
a
person.
James
Altucher:
I
mean,
I
think,
you
know,
you
talk
about
personal
stories,
but
I
do
want
to
say
that
I
think
the
transparency,
both
in
your
books
and
on
your
web
site
is
admirable.
Like,
I
mean,
you
talk
about
exactly
how
much
you
make.
I
love
your
last
post
where
you
talk
about
exactly,
and
you
break
down
the
numbers,
which
marketing
strategies
work.
So
you
have
a
lot
of
transparency
and
people
really
appreciate
that.
That
builds
a
lot
of
loyalty.
Maybe
talk
about
that
last
post.
Like,
what
are
the
best
market
like,
you
have
41
books.
How
do
you
market
these
things,
and
what
are
the
best
marketing
techniques?
Steve
Scott:
Well,
basically
what
I
did
was
about
a
year
ago,
April,
I
used
Amazon
Associate
links,
and
basically
what
Amazon
Associates
is,
its
an
affiliate
program
that
Amazon
runs
where
you
can
promote
books
through
an
affiliate
link,
or
pretty
much
promote
anything
on
Amazon
through
affiliate
links,
but
what
this
program
gives
you
is
also
it
shows
you
the
exact
clicks
conversion
rate
and
how
much
you
made
on
every
sale.
So
you
could
literally
create
an
affiliate
link
for
every
type
of
promotion
you
do,
and
I
decided
I
wanted
to
track
each
specific
marketing
campaign
that
I
did
with
all
my
books,
so
I
would
track
the
sidebar
on
my
blog,
so
how
many
people
clicked
on
that,
how
many
people
bought
through
that.
I
tracked
the
individual
e-mail
campaigns.
I
tracked
mentions
in
blog
posts.
I
pretty
much
tracked
everything
I
could
possibly
think
of,
and
at
the
end
of
the
day,
really
the
results
of
the
post
is
everything
was
predicated
on
e-mail
marketing.
Like,
I
bought
a
bunch
of
___
gigs
and
Facebook
advertisements.
Those
didnt
really
go
anywhere
and
all
the
stuff
I
thought
was
awesome
marketing
strategies,
they
sold
maybe
a
few
books,
but
they
didnt
really
do
much
for
the
overall
brand,
but
my
the
biggest
sales
and
the
ones
that
really
moved
a
lot
of
sales
was
that
initial
e-mail,
or
even
the
follow-up
e-mail
where
it
basically
said
I
have
a
new
book,
go
check
it
out,
and
really
I
would
say
if
thats
an
80-20,
most
of
my
sales
are
driven
just
by
that
first
initial
e-mail.
So
for
me,
it
made
sense
to
really
focus
on
that
one
strategy
and
to
stop
puttering
around
with
all
this
other
stuff
that
doesnt
really
work
as
well.
James Altucher: And whats the best way you found to build the e-mail list?
Steve
Scott:
Its
cyclical.
Ive
found
that
actually
Kindle
books
help
me
build
the
books
help
me
build
the
e-mail
list
to
sell
more
Kindle
books.
But
basically
James
Altucher:
Where
do
you
put
the
sign
up
for
the
e-mails?
You
put
it
in
the
beginning
or
the
end?
Steve
Scott:
In
the
beginning,
and
I
just
have
a
free
report,
77
Good
Habits
to
Develop
a
Better
Life,
or
something
like
that.
I
forget
the
actual
title.
And
I
just
send
them
right
to
a
squeeze
page
thatll
run
through
the
lead
pages
software
and
now
Im
currently
testing
a
couple
other
things.
Im
testing
search
engine
traffic,
blogging
and
SlideShare.
Im
trying
to
drive
traffic
from
those
sights
as
well,
but
for
now
its
really
the
Kindle
list
or
the
Kindle
books
is
whats
really
growing
the
e-mail
list.
James
Altucher:
It
sounds
like,
also
you
mentioned
in
your
post
that
SlideShare
was
really
good
for
building
the
e-mail
list.
Not
for
selling
books,
but
for
building
the
e-mail
list.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
exactly.
I
try
to
do
direct
sales,
so
I
had
a
couple,
basically
every
purpose
___
content,
like
from
the
procrastination
book,
I
had
a
couple
___
to
procrastination.
I
tried
to
have
a
direct
sales
at
the
end,
and
those
didnt
convert
at
all,
but
I
found
that
those
same
presentations,
as
long
as
you
provide
a
decent
deck
or
SlideShare
presentation,
people
will
go
to
your
e-mail
list
and
join,
and
so
Im
trying
to
really
leverage
that.
Im
trying
to
increase
the
success
for
that
strategy
right
now.
James
Altucher:
What
about
working
with
other
people
who
have
authoritative
voices
and
big
e-mail
lists?
Like,
have
you
tried
working,
you
know,
deals
with
them?
Steve
Scott:
The
one
thing
Im
exploring
are
all
the
paid
advertisement
platforms
BookBub,
e-Reader,
Newsday,
all
the
ones
that
really
promise
to
promote
books
for
you.
Definitely
Im
gonna
throw
some
money
at
that
and
see
how
well
those
convert.
Unfortunately,
they
dont
really
have
sort
of
tracking
links,
so
I
just
kinda
have
to
take
them
at
their
word
that
theyre
actually
doing
it.
James
Altucher:
Ive
tried
that,
and
they
dont
really
work
so
well,
at
least
for
me.
But
I
will
tell
you
my
numbers.
So
on
Choose
Yourself,
so
far
its
sold
about
150,000
copies,
and
40,000
of
that
was
through
direct
e-mail
marketing.
So
e-mail
marketing,
by
far,
was
number
one
for
marketing.
You
know,
and
the
rest
was
mostly
organic.
Steve
Scott:
Is
that
e-mail
marketing
through
your
list
or
were
you
just
able
to
talk
to
people
in
your
like,
people
that
you
know
and
friends
and
stuff?
James
Altucher:
People
would
reach
out
to
me
and
say
I
really
love
your
book.
Can
I
promote
it
on
my
e-mail
list
and
well
do
a
50-50
split.
And
then
I
would
put
together
like,
we
did
this
actually
so
Stansberry
&
Associates
is
hosting
this
podcast.
Porter
Stansberry
has
an
e-mail
list.
We
put
together
a
bundle
of
Choose
Yourself
hardcover,
which
wasnt
being
released
by
Amazon,
and
I
threw
in
some
free
books,
and
we
priced
the
bundle
at
$20.00.
I
think
the
real
value
was
something
like
$60.00.
And
then
we
split
50-50
the
result.
He
sold
30,000
copies
in,
like,
two
weeks
and,
yeah,
it
was
great.
And
then
one
other
group
sold
about
10,000
copies.
So
e-mail
marketing
was
really
powerful.
So
I
think
your
strategy
of
just
focusing
on
the
e-mail
list,
nothing
is
stronger.
Number
two
was
Reddit
was
very
strong
for
me.
Steve
Scott:
Really?
Ive
had
some
traffic
from
Reddit.
It
doesnt
convert
at
all,
but
I
think
thats
more
just
blog
traffic.
I
wasnt
it
was
more
of
a
random
thing
than
more
of
an
actual
trying
concerted
effort
on
my
part.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
Reddit
was
good
because
I
did
it
in
AMA,
you
know,
an
ask
me
anything,
and
so
if
you
did,
like,
and
AMA
about
habits
or
how
to
make
you
know,
if
you
did
an
AMA
how
to
make
$40,000
a
month
on
the
internet,
you
would
what
happened
was
people
who
werent
aware
of
me
at
all
suddenly
became
aware
of
me
and
bought
the
book.
Steve
Scott:
Ill
have
to
definitely
check
that
out.
I
actually
do
remember
you
now.
I
think
you
were
talking
to
Gary
Vaynerchuk
about
that
strategy
in
that
interview.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
actually
I
wrote
that
it
was
one
of
those
writer-downers,
and
I
forgot
to
write
it
down
and
actually
follow
up
on
it.
James Altucher: So whats your next couple of books that are coming out?
Steve
Scott:
Lately
Ive
been
really
kinda
just
trying
to
fine-tune
my
to-do
list
and
kinda
I
use
a
couple
different
to-do
lists,
and
I
really
felt
that
kinda
helps
my
productivity,
so
Im
writing
about
that.
And
Ive
been
really
getting
into
the
Evernote
app,
so
really
been
using
that
to
kind
of
manage
my
entire
life,
so
those
are
the
next
two.
And
theres
another
strategy
you
can
basically
put
a
book
for
free
on
Amazon
through
just
a
couple
little
techniques,
so
the
one
after
that
is
basically
Im
gonna
write
about
how
to
develop
good
habits
and
kinda
repurposing
some
blog
content,
but
put
it
more
of
a
step-
by-step
strategy,
but
I
hope
to
actually
get
that
completely
free
on
Amazon
so
I
can
use
that
to
kinda
drive
people
potentially
who
would
want
to
check
out
my
other
books.
James
Altucher:
And
now
that
youve
built
this
channel,
have
you
thought
and
I
think
I
know
the
answer
to
this,
but
have
you
thought
about
writing,
like,
a
novel
or,
you
know,
a
book
on
how
to
cure
cancer
or
anything
like
this?
Like
taking
you
out
of
your
bread
and
butter?
Steve
Scott:
I
guess
so.
I
did
talk
one
time
to,
like,
an
actual,
for
real
publishing
company.
I
just
dont
really
I
dont
know.
I
dont
really
have
the
interest
there,
and
I
know,
like,
getting
to
New
York
Times
bestseller,
like,
thats
like
a
dream
of
most
people.
I
dont
really
have
any
desire
to
have
that
happen.
Id
rather
Im
kinda
happy
with
my
own
little
niche
that
I
have
right
now
and
the
idea
of
writing
a
book
is
pretty
daunting.
James
Altucher:
You
know
how
many
copies
it
took
last
week,
so
this
is
a
very
good
publishing
month,
you
know,
May,
so
a
lot
of
people
buying
books,
I
guess.
You
know
how
many
books
it
took
to
get
to
be
Number
20
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list
last
week?
Steve
Scott:
What
was
that?
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
so
being
on
the
New
York
Times
and
thats
a
guy,
whoever
it
was,
I
dont
know
who
it
was,
but
whoever
it
was
was
published
by
a
mainstream
publisher
because
you
cant
really
sell
publishing
yet
on
the
list,
so
he
got
only
15
percent
in
royalty
on
1,800
copies,
so
you
basically
make
no
money
being
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list.
I
almost
shouldnt
say
this
out
loud.
Maybe
New
York
Times
will,
like,
block
me
after
this,
but
you
know,
so
I
think
your
strategy
of
making
$40,000
a
month
and
growing
is
a
lot
more
powerful
than
a
strategy
of
getting
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
Let
me
do
say
that
I
think
that
Ill
probably
reach
$40,000
this
month,
but
its
not
a
very
typical
month.
I
usually
I
do,
lately,
anywhere
from
$20,000
to
$25,000,
so
this
months
pretty
good.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
but
you
never
know.
Like,
havent
your
you
know,
what
its
showing
me
is
that
your
skills
are
getting
better,
you
have
more
books
out
there,
so
theres
no
reason
to
think
its
gonna
go
down
a
lot,
and
you
know
youre
gonna
have
more
books
out
in
the
next
month,
so
look
at
it
that
way.
Steve
Scott:
Thats
shocking
for
the
like,
I
knew
the
New
York
Times
it
was
a
low
volume,
but
Ive
definitely
done
that
in
the
last
week.
Ive
done,
like,
triple
that
in
the
last
week
so,
man,
I
kinda
wish
I
had
a
book
out
there
___.
James
Altucher:
Well,
you
know,
eventually
theyll
do
e-books,
I
bet,
on
the
New
York
Times.
You
know,
they
do
e-books
now,
but
you
also
have
to
be
in
bookstores
at
the
same
time,
so
like
the
and
Im
talking
about
Number
20
on
the
advice
list,
which
is
roughly
the
same
as
the
nonfiction
list,
and
youd
be
on
the
advice
list
anyway.
But
if
you
were
published
by
a
mainstream
publisher
and
you
were
in
bookstores
and
e-books,
even
if
it
was
just
your
e-book
selling,
thats
all
you
would
need
to
sell
is
1,800
copies.
Steve Scott: Yeah. Oh, wow. That really doesnt seem that much.
James
Altucher:
So,
you
know,
you
dont
do
anything
with,
like,
ads
on
your
web
site.
Its
all
just
kind
of
Kindle.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
just
I
guess
those
hard
lessons
I
learned
way
back
when,
even
from
the
initial
Evil
Eye
jewelry
site
is
that
you
really
just
want
to
focus
on
building
your
brand,
and
I
really
try
not
to
dilute
it
by
just
sending
people
all
over
the
place
to
different
products
and
offers.
That
being
said,
there
are
a
couple
of
people
that
I
really
like
their
books,
like,
Ill
recommend
those,
but
those
are
more
of
a
I
just
liked
this
book;
you
should
go
check
it
out,
not
like
a
trying
to
make
money
avenue.
But
yeah,
I
just
felt
its
better
just
to
grow
your
brand
and
really
since
e-mail
marketing
is
really
my
one
thing
thats
really
driving
sales,
I
should
just
really
focus
on
(A)
getting
as
many
people
as
possible
on
my
list
and
(B)
really
engaging
them
so
when
they
do
come
time
for
the
ask,
theyll
actually
go
buy
the
book.
Steve
Scott:
Right
now,
I
have
two
different
lists.
For
the
internet
marketing
list,
I
have
13,000
and
for
the
habits
list,
I
think
its
right
today
I
think
it
was,
like,
7,500.
James
Altucher:
Thats
great.
Okay.
And
what
made
you
decide
to
be
two
people
S.J.
Scott
and
Steve
Scott?
And,
you
know,
your
photos
even
look
totally
different
between
the
two
authors.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
actually
I
really
dont.
I
dont
think
I
do.
Im
not
even
trying
to
hide
the
fact
theyre
two
separate
people.
Basically
Im
pretty
honest
about
it.
The
reason
I
chose
those
two
is
because
I
didnt
want
habit
people
to
suddenly
see
a
bunch
of
internet
marketing
books
and
potentially
lose
a
sale
because
it
has
nothing
to
do
with
what
they
want
to
learn,
and
the
same
goes
for
pretty
much
internet
business.
I
want
basically
to
have
two
totally
separate
lines
where
basically
people
can
read
the
type
of
content
they
want
to
read.
James
Altucher:
But
you
know,
though,
like
internet
marketing
feels
like
declutter
your
inbox
to
me
as
well.
You
know,
theyre
all
kinda
related.
Steve
Scott:
And
Ill
be
the
first
to
say
I
definitely
promote
the
habit
books
to
the
internet
marketing
crowd.
Im
not
afraid
to
do
that,
but
I
also
feel
that
if
youre
in
the
habits
market
and
you
dont
run
an
internet
business,
I
dont
want
potentially
lose
a
lifelong
customer
just
by
them
getting
it
confused
looking
at
55
Ways
to
Make
Money
Online.
I
wanna
make
absolutely
sure
they
get
the
book
that
they
want
to
read
and,
unfortunately
the
way
Amazons
designed,
its
really
hard
to
set
up
a
really
pleasing
dashboard
where
I
can
I
cant
really
tuck
those
books
away.
They
have
to
be
front
and
center,
so
if
you
have
more
than
30,
40
books,
it
gets
really
cluttered
on
the
actual
dashboard
or
the
actual
author
page.
James
Altucher:
Well,
you
know,
I
love
your
strategy
of
using
different
Amazon
Associates
affiliate
links
to
track
your
essentially
your
book
analytics.
You
know,
Amazon
offers
no
platform
for
tracking
analytics,
and
Ive
talked
to
Amazon
about
this.
They
are
interested
in
eventually
doing
it,
but
its
it
takes
a
lot
of
work.
So
your
workaround
is
very
powerful.
I
think
its
a
business
idea.
I
think
you
can
basically
go
to
any
author
who
has
a
lot
of
books
or
go
to
a
publisher
and
say
we
have
a
way
of
tracking
analytics
across
marketing
programs
across
all
of
your
books.
You
know,
charge
Harper-
Collins,
like,
you
know,
$5,000
per
book
per
month
and
theyve
got
200
books
they
wanna
track,
I
bet
you
can
make
a
lot
of
money
that
way.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
Im
sure
you
could.
That
being
said,
Ive
recently
learned
that
maybe
putting
associates
links
in
e-mails
is
not
really
is
not
allowed
according
to
Amazon
Associates
term
of
services,
so
I
might
have
to
rethink
that.
Like,
for
me,
the
worst
thing
that
happens
I
lose
my
Associates
account,
which
that
doesnt
really
make
a
whole
lot
of
money
for
me,
but
Im
not
too
sure
its
completely
kosher
with
their
rules.
James
Altucher:
I
see.
I
see
right
now,
actually,
in
self-help,
S.J.
Scott
is
ahead
of
is
right
ahead
of
Ryan
Holiday
in
your
author
rank.
You
know,
if
you
had
S.J.
Scott
and
Steve
Scott
combined,
you
might
be,
like,
the
number
one
self-help
author
in
the
world
right
now
on
Amazon.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
was
thinking
that
the
other
day.
Im
like,
too
bad
I
didnt
combine
these
books,
but
I
made
a
decision
for
a
specific
reason.
I
like
to
stick
to
it,
and
at
the
end
of
the
day,
if
Im
not
number
one,
I
guess
its
more
kind
of
a
vanity
metric.
Id
rather
just
run
a
successful
business
than
have
some
sort
of
accolade,
I
guess.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
and
your
author
rank
is
number
six
in
business
and
investing
and
numbers
one
and
two
are
the
freakonomics
guys,
then
Thomas
Piketty,
who
had
the
number
one
book,
and
then
I
dont
know
these
next
two,
and
then
is
you.
And
then
youre
after
youre
higher
than
Michael
Lewis,
who
wrote
Flashboys.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
sometimes
thats
always
thats
for
Kindle
books,
and
I
try
to
remind
myself
its
just
for
Kindle
books.
Im
sure
if
we
did
print
versions,
theyd
kill
my
numbers,
but
its
kinda
cool
sometimes
to
see
my
face
___
a
lot
of
people
I
deeply
admire.
James Altucher: Whats your ratio between Kindle books sold and paperbacks?
Steve
Scott:
My
paperbacks
are
terrible.
I
would
say
maybe
1
percent,
2
percent.
Its
really
low.
Id
say
this
month
I
think
Ive
sold
160
physical
books
so
far,
really
not
a
lot.
James
Altucher:
And
why
dont
you
do
audio
books?
Because,
you
know,
the
personal
improvement
category,
audio
books
like
Amazon
owns
Audible,
audio
books
do
very
well.
Steve
Scott:
I
do,
actually.
Six
of
my
well,
Habit
Stacking
is
still
waiting
for
approval,
but
itll
be
number
six,
but
six
of
my
habit
books
there
is
an
audio
version.
Steve
Scott:
They
do
well.
I
would
say
maybe
5
to
10
percent
of
my
Kindle
book
sales,
so
nothing
like
the
Kindle
books,
but
they
sell
pretty
well
and
at
a
little
bit
higher
royalty
rate.
I
think
I
get
350
for
every
audio
book
sold.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
yeah,
no,
I
was
surprised
how
well
audio
was.
I
only
did
it
once
for
my
last
book
and
it
was
great.
Like,
the
results
have
been
fantastic.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah.
I
definitely
like
it.
I
feel
that
people
are
going
to
be
listening
to
more
audio
content
in
the
future,
so
I
dont
do
them
myself.
I
just
Im
not
a
natural
speaker,
like
I
mentioned
before,
so
I
have
a
guy
who
basically
records
them
for
me.
James
Altucher:
And
so
I
always
get
worried
about
if
Im
gonna
do
a
bunch
of
small
books
that
Im
almost,
like,
saturating
my
lets
say
my
personal
brand
too
much,
you
know,
so
Ive
been
doing
kind
of
like
a
book
a
year,
but
you
know,
youve
sort
of
convinced
me,
like
just
seeing
you
in
progress,
you
know,
(A)
books
can
be
smaller
and
more
frequent
and
just
another
outlet
for
releasing
content,
the
way
blogs
are.
So
its
interesting.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
the
way
I
kind
of
describe
it
to
myself
and
others
is
everyone
knows
about
blogs,
and
basically
the
idea
of
blogs,
you
write
about
one
particular
topic
and
you
kind
of
deep
dive,
and
everyone
knows
about
books
that
are
pretty
much
extensive
300,
400
page
books.
I
like
to
think
of
kind
of
these
Kindle
books
as
a
little
bit
more
advanced
than
a
blog
post,
but
not
quite
the
multiple
levels
of
edits
and
all
the
stuff
that
goes
behind
publishing
a
traditionally-published
book.
But
its
just
kind
of
like
you
basically
take
a
pretty
extensive
blog
post
concept
and
really
do
your
best
to
answer
every
possible
question
about
that,
and
for
me,
thats
what
a
Kindle
book
is.
Its
that
kind
of
merging
area.
James
Altucher:
So
lets
take
this
to
the
listener
whos
listening
to
this
right
now.
They
have
an
interest
or
a
passion.
Lets
say
theyre
interested
in,
I
dont
know,
golf
or
computer
programming
or
starting
a
business
or
whatever.
How
can
they
start
doing
what
youve
done,
basically,
you
know,
lets
take
them
to
the
end
where
you
have
40
books
out
there
and
youre
just
making
this
passive
income
stream
thats
coming
in
every
day.
Steve
Scott:
Well,
lets
use
golf
as
an
example,
and
forgive
me
if
I
screw
up
any
golf
terms
cause
I
just
I
dont
golf.
But
I
know
from
a
fact
that
golfing
is
like
a
huge
market.
People
absolutely
love
the
idea
of
golfing.
But
I
would
take
each
individual
part
of
what
it
takes
to
be
a
good
golfer
and
actually
break
it
down
into
individual
small
little
books.
So
theres
how
to
improve
your
golf
swing
or
how
to
take
ten
strokes
off
of
your
golf
whatever,
but
basically
you
would
break
it
down.
I
would
say
even
how
to
find
the
best
equipment.
They
could
write
a
whole
book
about
that
and
maybe
even
whole
product
reviews
of
certain
drivers
and
putters
and
that
sort
of
thing.
you
literally
just
take
the
whole
broad
golf
topic
and
just
write
a
small
book
about
each
specific
golf
topic
and
just
build
a
brand
around
all
these
tiny
little
topics
and
just
basically,
I
would
start
with
what
you
know
best,
what
is
the
one
thing
you
really
know
about
golf
and
you
write
about
that
and
then
get
some
feedback
from
readers
what
they
like
about
it,
what
they
dont
like
about
it
and
just
keep
trying
to
iterate
and
improve
on
every
single
future
book
that
you
release.
James
Altucher:
And
how
would
you
market
that
first,
lets
say
five
or
six
books
before
you
have,
like,
an
e-mail
list.
So
you
have
a
sign-up
for
so
youre
gonna
have
a
squeeze
page
and
a
special
report
for
free,
so
people
sign
up
for
the
e-mail
list.
Initially
you
have
zero
people
on
the
e-mail
list.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
would
say
first
off,
and
actually
let
me
go
back
real
quick
and
say
the
first
thing
you
should
do
is,
honestly,
you
should
start
building
the
e-mail
list.
So
you
want
to
create
some
sort
of
free
report
or
some
sort
of
quick
offer
that
you
can
get
people
to
joint
your
e-mail
list.
So
that
could
be
your
old
like,
how
to
reduce
your
strokes
off
your
golf
swing
or
whatever.
Steve
Scott:
I
would
say
just
put
it
on
a
squeeze
page
or
a
blog.
I
like
squeeze
pages
cause
its
a
simple
yes
or
no
action.
Either
they
join
your
list
or
they
dont
join
your
list
and
you
could
basically
type
squeeze
pages
into
Google
and
people
can
youve
got
to
find
templates
for
free.
You
could
go
to
Fiverr.com
and
pay
someone
to
design
a
quick
squeeze
page,
or
I
use
lead
pages,
which
is,
like,
30,
40
bucks
a
month,
which
is
a
little
more
expensive,
but
basically
theres
lots
of
different
software
out
there
where
you
can
just
host
it
on
a
single
page
and
people
can
either
join
the
list
or
dont
join
your
list.
And
then,
from
there,
I
would
put
in
the
front
of
put
in
front
of
your
Kindle
book.
Release
the
Kindle
book
for
free,
honestly,
because,
like,
you
really
dont
have
an
audience
there,
so
trying
to
release
it
for
99
cents,
you
wont
have
the
traction
thats
required,
but
you
want
to
start
building
your
audience
and
start
getting
those
people
on
e-mail
list.
And
in
conjunction
with
that,
I
would
recommend
starting
one
of
three
platforms,
either
a
blog,
a
podcast,
or
YouTube,
just
something
where
youre
providing
free
content.
It
can
even
be
free
content
you
ultimately
put
into
a
Kindle
boo,
but
continuously
provide
free
content
and
throughout
this
free
content,
just
kind
of
bang
the
drum
of
join
my
e-mail
list
for
this
free
report
and
try
to
build
like,
try
to
get
as
many
subscribers
as
possible
from
this
one
platform
while
youre
writing
Kindle
books.
I
would
just
basically
recommend
do
those
two
strategies
and
just
repeat
those
two
strategies.
James
Altucher:
I
see.
So
you
wouldnt
necessarily
pay
for,
like,
Google
ads
to
drive
traffic
to
the
squeeze
page.
James
Altucher:
Well,
if
you
think
about
it,
Amazon
is
probably
one
of
the
biggest
search
engines
on
the
planet,
and
it
ties
right
in
very
highly
to
the
Google
search
engine,
so
what
better
place.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
absolutely.
And
I
like
the
idea
of
youre
basically
building
your
platform
at
the
same
time
as
youre
making
money,
and
honestly,
I
wouldnt
I
would
say
dont
be
afraid
of
making
mistakes
or
writing
something,
maybe,
that
doesnt
go
over
well.
Like,
Ive
had
a
couple
books
that
are
complete
disasters
that
just
I
thought
they
were
great
ideas
and
they
just
they
tanked,
and
just
Steve
Scott:
Resolutions
that
stick.
I
was
so
absolutely
sure
that
would
be
an
awesome
slam
dunk
book
right
around
New
Years
Eve,
and
no
one
wanted
to
be
lectured
to
about
changing
their
New
Year
or
the
way
they
approached
New
Years
resolutions.
So
basically
it
was
just
James
Altucher:
You
know
what
I
would
do?
I
would
write
a
book
why
you
dont
need
to
do
any
resolutions
anymore.
Like,
cause
people
dont
wanna
do
stuff.
Steve
Scott:
Yeah,
I
kinda
try
to
hook
them
in
with
the
idea
that
they
want
to
find
out
about
resolutions,
but
basically
the
whole
book
is
about
how
you
dont
need
New
Years
resolutions;
its
better
to
create
goals
and
to
do
things
in
small
increments,
but
yeah,
that
book
tanked.
It
was
I
did
make
my
money
back
that
I
invested
for
the
e-cover
and
the
edits
and
all
that,
but
yeah,
it
sells,
like,
two
copies
a
month.
James Altucher: So you keep track of the P&L for each book.
James Altucher: And do you sell on iBooks as well or do you stick to Amazon?
Steve
Scott:
I
stick
to
Amazon
just
because
I
found,
for
me,
the
key
to
the
___
program,
especially
now
that
they
have
countdown
deals,
they
really
drive
a
lot
of
traffic
and
they
really
drive
a
lot
of
sales
just,
for
some
odd
reason,
having
a
ticking
clock
really
kinda
can
push
readers
to
really
buy
books
cause
they
think
oh,
its
a
low
price
for
only
a
certain
amount
of
time.
Let
me
grab
it
now
before
its
too
late,
and
now
that
I
have
so
many
books,
I
can
basically
have
something
on
countdown
deals
pretty
much
every
single
week
and
I
really
feel
it
helps
the
overall
brand.
James
Altucher:
Well,
I
really
hope
my
two
daughters
listen
to
this
podcast
because
I
think
this
is
what
people
should
be
doing
instead
of
honestly,
instead
of
going
to
college.
Like,
this
is
how
theyre
gonna
learn
about
topics,
will
start
making
money,
theyll
build
community.
Im
sure
youve
met
a
lot
of
people
in
the
kind
of
publishing
and
self-
publishing
space,
and
you
start
to
build
a
like,
what
did
you
major
in
in
college?
Steve
Scott:
Oh,
no,
no.
I
was
in
debt
just
for,
like,
dumb
mistakes
I
made
with
a
credit
card,
but
I
was
fortunate
enough
to
have
my
grandfather
pay
for
my
super
high-tech
Montclair
State
University
degree.
But
yeah,
I
didnt
really
no
student
loans
but,
you
know,
I
was
in
debt
for
a
long
time,
but
I
got
myself
out
of
it
and
Im
doing
pretty
well
financially
now.
James
Altucher:
Well,
Steve,
thank
you
so
much
for
all
that
youve
shared
on
this
podcast.
Like,
I
honestly
think
this
one
podcast
is
business
or
self-sufficiency
in
a
box.
Like,
people
could
take
this,
take
what
youve
just
said
and
build
careers
for
themselves,
and
I
hope
some
people
do
that
because
I
think
this
is
really
great
info.
I
know
I
love
writing
so
this
is
really
fun
stuff
for
me
to
hear
about,
and
it
was
its
great
to
have
you
on
the
show.
Steve Scott: Well, thanks a lot, James. This has been super fun.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
thanks,
Steve,
and
Ill
talk
to
you
soon.
And
look,
Im
gonna
sign
up
for
your
list
so
I
get
your
next
habit
habit-breaking,
or
habit-forming
books.
James
Altucher:
This
is
James
Altucher
and
Claudia
Altucher
with
another
episode
of
Ask
Altucher.
James
Altucher:
And,
Claudia,
we
have
with
us
a
guest
that
Ive
been
dying
to
ask
this
one
question
of.
Its
Michael
Drew.
Mike,
how
are
you
doing?
James
Altucher:
And,
Mike,
Im
just
gonna
give
kind
of
the
highlight
ofor
some
highlights
on
your
career,
but
the
main
thing
is
you
help
authors
get
onto
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list.
And
youre
basicallyand
correct
me
if
Im
wrongyoure
80
out
of
80,
so
80
authors
youve
attempted
to
get
onto
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list,
and
youve
succeeded
all
80
times.
Is
that
correct?
James
Altucher:
Yes,
because
its
actuallyweve
seenand
you
saw
this
with
us,
Michael.
We
had
an
example
on
our
most
recent
book
where
we
got
on
the
Wall
Street
Journal
bestseller
list,
we
got
on
the
USA
Today
bestseller
list,
and
people
we
beat
got
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list
but
we
didnt
get
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list.
And
so
now
you
magically
can
get
anybody
it
seems
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list,
so
we
have
to
ask
youthe
question
of
the
day
is
how
do
you
get
people
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list?
Michael
Drew:
Oh,
James,
Id
love
to
say
Im
magical.
That
would
make
me
in
much
more
demand
than
I
am.
James
Altucher:
You
are
magical
and
you
should
be
in
demand
because,
you
know,
as
much
as
I
am
a
believer
in
the
choose
yourself
philosophy
whereand
I
think
the
New
York
Times
list
is
just
a
gatekeeper,
like
anyone
anywhere
else.
It
actually
is
still
looked
up
to
in
the
industry,
so
if
youre
gonna
go
that
route
of
the
traditionally
published
author
you
might
as
well
try
to
get
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list.
It
cant
hurt,
so
you
should
be
in
demand.
So
thats
why
Im
asking
the
question.
Michael
Drew:
I
appreciate
that.
So
heres
the
thing
to
know.
The
New
York
Times
or
the
Wall
Street
Journal
or
USA
Today,
theyre
not
real
bestsellers
lists.
They
dont
count
real
sales
in
real
time.
James
Altucher:
Now
you
dont
think
the
USA
Today
or
Wall
Street
Journal
one
does?
Because
it
seems
likeagain,
because
we
made
those
lists,
it
seems
like
they
were
pretty
accurate.
Michael
Drew:
They
have
different
sets
of
criterial
that
allowed
you
to
make
their
lists.
But
they
dont
count
all
the
sales
either.
USA
Today
is
probably
the
cleanest.
If
you
meet
some
very
rudimentary
criteria
of
having
the
right
number
of
reporting
channels,
they
will
count
all
of
the
sales
that
are
reported
if
you
have
enough
reporting
channels,
whereas
say
BookScan,
which
controls
the
Wall
Street
Journal
list,
has
about
70
percent
of
their
sales
that
come
in
counted.
They
are
knownthey
have
it
stated
in
their
system
that
they
discriminate
against
book
based
upon
very
specific
criteria.
As
an
example,
my
good
friend
Bob
Hughes
used
to
compile
the
Wall
Street
Journal
bestsellers
list.
He
is
now
a
co-
owner
of
the
company
with
me.
And
hewhen
he
worked
at
the
Journal
compiling
the
bestsellers
list,
you
would
see
Seven
Habits
of
Highly
Effective
People
on
the
business
list
almost
every
single
week,
and
thats
because
the
book
as
a
business
title
sells
exceptionally
well
with
corporations.
Well,
BookScan
has
a
policy
that
says
if
there
are
any
bulk
orders
at
allB-U-L-Kthey
will
not
allow
that
book
to
make
the
bestsellers
list.
That
is
their
policy.
James
Altucher:
How
do
they
know
somethings
a
bulk
order,
like
if
its
order
though
1-800-CEO-READ?
Michael
Drew:
No.
You
know,
Jack
is
a
friend
of
mine;
Ive
known
him
for
many
years.
But
they
used
towell,
certainly
800-CEO-READ
reports
bulk
sales,
but
its
now
those
sales
are
reported
that
makes
a
difference.
If,
as
an
example,
you
place
anif
a
corporation
buys
50
copies
of
Seven
Habits
of
Highly
Effective
People
from
Barnes
&
Noble
at
an
individual
store,
that
individual
stores
computer
system
will
report
to
Barnes
&
Noble
corporate
that
they
sold
50
books
to
one
customer,
right?
So
that
is
then
reported
by
Barnes
&
Noble
corporate
office
to
the
New
York
Times
as,
We
had
3,000
orders
last
week
with
a
total
of
500
consumers
placing
the
orders
for
those
3,000
books,
so
they
know
the
number
of
orders
that
are
being
placed.
Now
in
some
regards
I
appreciate,
say
on
a
book
of
fiction,
where
you
should
not
be
seeing
many
bulk
orders
coming
through;
that
doesnt
make
a
lot
of
sense.
But
again,
the
Wall
Street
Journal
through
BookScan
does
discriminate
against
any
order
where
you
have
a
bulk
order.
And
if
you
were
on
the
nonfiction
side
of
things,
you
have
a
business
book
or
a
self-help
book
or
even
some
diet
and
cookbooks
where
you
could
have
corporations
or
associations
buying
in
bulk,
what
you
actually
have
is
a
discrimination
by
BookScan
based
upon
their
own
arbitrary
decision
to
now
count
those
sales.
And
so
every
bestsellers
list
has
their
own
criteria
for
how
they
count
the
sales.
USA
Today
simply
says,
If
you
have
X
number
of
reporting
retailers,
we
will
count
all
of
the
sales
that
are
reported.
Now
you
could
sellif
you
had
one
retailer,
call
it
Amazon,
and
no
other
retailers
reporting,
then
USA
Today
will
take
a
look
at
whether
or
not
they
should
count
your
sales
or
not.
But
usually
if
you
have
Amazon
reporting
youll
have
probably
Barnes
&
Noble
or
Books-a-Million
or
one
of
the
othertwo
or
three
other
retailers
reporting,
and
its
not
that
difficult
then
to
make
the
USA
Today
list,
cause
you
could
sell
1,000
at
Amazon
and
100
over
at
Barnes
&
Noble
and
100
at
Books-A-Million;
if
those
are
all
reported
youll
make
the
USA
Today
list
because
you
had
enough
sales
reported
collectively
and
enough
reporting
channels.
But
if
you
only
had
say
Barnes
&
Noble,
you
had
no
other
sales
from
anywhere
else
period,
then
USA
Today
may
consider
not
counting
those
sales.
So
I
would
say
in
terms
of
sales
volume,
USA
Today
is
closest.
The
Wall
Street
Journal
has
their
own
criteria
for
discriminating
and
eliminating
sales.
And
the
New
York
Times,
as
the
oldest
list,
has
a
more
archaic
system
in
terms
of
how
they
gather
the
data
and
a
further
archaic
system
for
how
they
count
those
sales
that
are
being
reported.
One
thing
to
note,
you
still
have
a
person
at
both
USA
Today
and
at
the
New
York
Times
that
counts
those
sales.
You
have
a
person
at
Barnes
&
Noble
and
Amazon
and
Books-a-Million
and
Ed
Hudsons
and
beyond
that
reports
those
sales
to
the
bestsellers
list.
The
only
electronic
system
that
you
have
is
BookScan
and
they
still
only
represent
about
70
percent
of
all
books
that
are
sold.
And
even
thenIll
give
you
an
example.
I
had
a
client
who
did
a
book
signing
in
Cleveland.
The
retailer
bought
in
1,000
books.
They
sold,
Id
like
to
say,
500,
600
books
Michael
Drew:
One
week,
soat
that
event.
So
that
retailer
reported
to
BookScan,
hey,
in
one
week
that
they
sold
500
books,
but
the
next
week
when
that
retailer
returned
books
back
to
Ingram,
the
wholesaler,
then
BookScan
showed
that
that
book
retailer
had
sold
a
negative
500
books
for
the
week.
Michael
Drew:
[Laughter]
Which
is
silly,
cause
they
didnt
not
sell
the
books.
It
wasnt
negative.
There
was
awhat
I
call
a
precipitory
event,
a
book
signing.
They
sold
the
books,
they
didnt
need
the
excess
inventory,
and
rightfully
returned
that
back
to
the
publisher.
So
you
have
systems
that
are
not
flawless.
You
know,
getting
a
book
on
the
bestsellers
list
is
not
that
dissimilar
to
getting
your
website
ranked
in
search
engine
optimization
except
that
the
criteria
is
based
around
the
number
of
books
that
are
being
sold,
the
number
of
reporting
channels,
the
weight
of
those
reporting
channels
within
the
algorithm
at
the
various
bestsellers
lists.
James
Altucher:
So
how
do
youso
two
questions
really.
How
do
you
personally
guarantee
a
book
to
be
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list,
and
then
what
should
somebody
do
if
they
dont
have
you
on
their
side
to
get
something
on
the
bestseller
list,
any
of
the
bestseller
lists?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
heres
the
thing.
First
of
all,
I
dont
guarantee
my
service.
Im
just
that
good
where
I
dont
miss.
Pardon
the
Michael
Drew:
Soand
thank
you;
I
appreciate
that.
Sobut
Im
pretty
darn
good
at
what
I
do.
Heres
the
thing:
you
have
the
mechanics
on
the
back
end
of
how
the
retailers
report
sales
to
the
bestsellers
list.
The
books
that
I
would
call
organically
make
the
list,
meaning
theres
not
a
specific
marketing
campaign
designed
to
drive
traffic
into
stores
to
buy
books,
so
its
just
naturally,
organically
selling.
Those
books
have
between
30
to
40
percent
of
their
actual
sales
being
reported
and
counted
by
the
bestsellers
lists.
So
when
a
client
hires
my
firm,
what
were
doing
is
were
leveraging
what
we
call
their
marketing
platform
in
selling
the
book
in
a
controlled
fashion
so
that
we
can
ensure
that
we
have
the
right
number
of
sales
going
through
the
right
reporting
channels
at
the
right
timeframe.
We
actually
call
this
the
Harry
Potter
effect.
What
most
people
dont
realize
in
publishing
is
that
if
youre
Harry
Potter
or
youre
a
John
Grisham
or
a
Steven
King,
you
have
a
competitive
advantage
over
everyone
else
because
your
publisher
will
have
a
legal
agreement
with
the
retailers
called
embargoing.
And
this
legal
agreement
literally
states
if
a
retailer,
say
an
individual
Barnes
&
Noble
store,
puts
a
copy
of,
say,
Harry
Potter
on
their
bookshelf
before
the
pub
date,
that
that
retailer
will
pay
a
penalty
of
anywhere
from
$2,500.00
per
book
to
$2.5
million
per
copy
of
the
book,
which
was
what
the
penalty
was
on
the
last
Harry
Potter
book.
Michael
Drew:
Now
the
advantage
of
that
to
these
big
authors
is
that
the
retailers
are
spending
a
year
or
two
or
three
years
holding
these
sales
on
behalf
of
these
big
books.
So
when
a
Harry
Potter
book
was
announced
you
had
all
of
these
fans
go
into
local
bookstores,
order
the
book.
The
retailers
would
hold
the
money,
and
when
the
Harry
Potter
book
was
released
you
have
a
million
or
two
or
three
or
four
or
five
million
sales
that
are
dumped
into
the
system
all
on
the
same
day.
So
obviously
the
book
is
going
to
hit
number
one
when
that
book
is
launched.
Well,
thats
unfair
to
everybody
else,
because
the
legal
cost
for
embargoing
is
hundreds
of
thousands
or
millions
of
dollars
to
the
publishers
and
they
dont
do
it
very
often,
and
the
retailers
hate
it.
So
what
I
advocate
for
my
clients
is
to
embargo
their
own
sales
to
consumers
and
to
do
a
controlled
release
of
those
sales
directly
to
the
retailers
the
week
or
two
after
the
books
been
launched.
Now
the
way
James
Altucher:
How
do
they
do
that,
though?
Cause
most
of
your
clients
are
probablyyou
know,
have
publishers.
Michael
Drew:
Well,
Iso
Ill
give
you
a
couple
of
examples.
One
of
my
authors,
his
name
is
Roy
H.
Williams.
Hes
known
as
the
Wizard
of
Ads.
He
owns
the
fourth-largest
ad
agency
in
North
America
for
buying
radio
advertising.
Hes
exceptionally
well-known
in
radio.
Every
general
manager
of
every
radio
station
in
North
America
knows
who
Roy
is
because
theyre
always
vying
for
his
clients
money,
and
so
______
literally
controlling
that.
He
also
writes
for
Radio,
Inc.,
which
is
one
of
the
top
trade
publications
for
radio.
And
what
we
did
is
we
leveraged
what
we
call
his
marketing
platform,
his
name
and
reputation
within
the
radio
industry.
And
what
we
did
is
we
mailed
out
an
advance
copy
of
the
book
to
the
10,000
radio
station
general
managers
in
North
America
with
an
offer
that
said,
If
you
buy
20
copies
of
this
book
on
this
date
from
this
retailer
and
run
200
radio
ads
promoting
the
book,
well
give
you
a
copy
of
Roy
H.
Williamsthis
was
a
few
years
ago12-tape
training
library
which
will
train
your
sales
reps
on
how
to
better
sell
radio,
and
this
book
should
be
given
by
your
sales
reps
to
potential
customers.
The
book
will
advocate
and
______
your
customers
on
buying
radio,
and
because
these
books
are
given
to
them
by
your
now-trained
radio
sales
reps
that
were
trained
by
Roy,
youll
increase
your
sales
conversion
rate.
And
so
we
mailed
that
out.
We
had
1,100
stations
that
participated.
We
launched
the
book
to
number
one
on
the
Wall
Street
Journal,
number
three
on
the
New
York
Times,
had
over
a
million
radio
ads
played
nationwide.
We
leveraged
his
platform
to
be
able
to
generate
those
sales.
Another
example
would
be
I
have
a
clienthis
name
is
Ivan
Misner.
He
owns
a
company
called
BNI,
Business
Network
International.
Its
the
worlds
largest
business
referral
organization.
And
in
BNI
what
they
do
is
its
a
weekly
chapter
meeting,
and
a
chapter
of
New
York
or
LA
are
basically
the
same.
They
allow
one
person
per
industry
per
chapter,
and
essentially
what
they
do
is
they
have
a
forced
referral
system.
So
every
week
they
pick
two
members
that
all
of
the
other
chapters
must
go
out
and
get
warm
or
hot
leads
for.
BNI
is
also
a
franchised
organization,
and
so
what
we
didand
we
did
this
with
two
books,
Masters
of
Networking
and
then
Master
of
Success,
is
we
had
the
franchise
owners
contribute
a
chapter
to
the
book,
Masters
of
Networking,
and
then
we
did
a
membership
drive
by
doing
the
first
time
56
book
signings
in
56
different
stores
nationwide
at
the
same
time
on
the
same
day.
We
burned
every
Guinness
World
Record
and
some
other
things,
and
we
again
launched
the
booknumber
one
Wall
Street
Journal,
number
two
New
York
Times,
so
on
and
so
forth.
And
then
when
we
James Altucher: How did you know which stores to focus on?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
heres
the
thing.
There
are
some
obvious
ones.
Barnes
&
Noble,
Books-a-Million,
and
at
the
time
when
we
did
that
book
Borders
was
still
a
relevant
retailer.
What
you
know
definitively
is
that
the
major
chains
all
report
to
the
New
York
TimesBarnes
&
Noble,
Books-a-Million,
Borders
did,
Amazon,
Hudsons.
So
theres
very
clear
national
chains
that
report.
The
chains
that
they
rotate
or
the
retailers
that
they
rotate
for
counting
are
the
independent
stores.
One
of
the
things
that
most
people
dont
realize
is
that,
well,
theres
probably
800
stores
that
report
to
the
New
York
Times
each
and
every
week.
Theyre
only
counting
50
to
75
of
their
sales
every
week
and
theyre
rotating
which
retailers
theyre
counting
the
sales
from
because
they
dont
want
you
to
go
into
the
independents
to
be
able
to
game
the
system
essentially.
So
what
I
do
with
Roy
and
with
Ivan
and
beyond
is
make
sure
that
were
leveraging
the
big
boys,
which
in
some
ways
isnt
as
fun;
in
other
ways
it
makes
it
easier
because
we
know
that
theyre
reporting.
We
leverage
the
big
boy
reporters
in
driving
the
traffic
and
sales
to
those
stores,
and
then
the
independents
come
in.
We
do
have
independent
stores
that
we
work
with
like
800-CEO-READ
and
Tattered
Cover
and
BookPeople
and
others,
but
we
primarily
focus
on
the
big
retailers.
Now
its
truth
that
requires
having
a
relationship
at
the
corporate
office
with
those
retailers,
which
I
do,
because
they
know
that
my
clients
are
genuinely
generating
sales.
As
you
can
imagine,
having
the
information
and
knowledge
that
I
do
it
would
be
very
easy
for
someone
to
come
in
and
game
the
system
and
literally
buy
their
way
onto
the
bestsellers
list,
which
people
have
done
in
the
past.
But
for
me
and
my
clients,
what
II
wont
allow
my
clients
to
do
that.
We
are
genuinely
leveraging
their
existing
platform
to
sell
those
books
and
driving
those
sales
through
the
retailers.
Were
simplywere
not
breaking
the
rules.
Were
simply
playing
the
game
better
than
anyone
else
because
of
my
relationships
and
understanding
of
how
to
leverage
____
platform
to
pre-sell
books
so
that
we
can
have
that
Harry
Potter
effect.
Claudia
Altucher:
Thats
very
interesting,
and
I
have
a
question,
Michael.
There
was
recentlyI
dont
know;
you
probably
werent
involved
on
this.
But
there
was
that
book
America:
Imagine
a
World
Without
It,
and
I
think
it
released
together
with
a
movie,
and
it
was
a
little
bit
of
a
sensation
throughout
the
United
States.
And
the
book
made
all
the
lists
except
for
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
to
the
point
where
people
started
writing
articles
on
the
Huffington
Post
and
other
media
outlets
saying,
Hey,
whats
happening
here?
How
is
this
possible?
And
eventually
the
book
did
make
it
to
the
list
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller.
And
I
was
wondering,
what
are
your
thoughts
on
that?
What
do
you
think
happened?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
theres
politics
thats
involved
at
the
New
York
Times.
At
the
end
of
the
day
you
have
someone
that
is
the
editorial
director
of
the
book
portion
of
the
newspaper
that
approves
the
bestsellers
list.
So
they
go
through
and
apply
their
system,
but
dont
be
fooled.
There
is
politics
at
the
New
York
Times.
In
fact
I
worked
on
a
book
by
a
Christian
pastor
a
number
of
years
ago,
and
we
made
number
one
on
USA
Today,
number
one
on
Wall
Street
Journal,
and
the
New
York
Times
literally
stated
to
us,
We
dont
allow
religious
books
on
our
bestsellers
lists
so
we
are
not
going
to
include
it
on
our
list,
right?
James
Altucher:
So
wait.
Were
you
able
to
get
that
pastor
on
the
list?
Were
you
able
to
kind
of
fight
it?
Michael
Drew:
I
fought
and
fought
and
I
was
able
to
ultimately
get
them
to
not
allow
us
at
number
one
but
get
us
at
number
two.
James Altucher: Oh, okay, and on the nonfiction or on the advice list?
Michael
Drew:
But
note,
we
had
the
sales
to
be
number
one.
We
had
more
than
triple
the
number
of
sales
for
six
weeks
before
they
finally
let
it
on
the
list,
and
it
was
a
political
fight
that
I
had
to
put
my
own
reputation
on
the
line
for.
James
Altucher:
So
heres
a
question,
and
I
know
this
changes
week
by
week,
but
whats
the
minimum
number
of
sales
usuallylike
lets
say
mid-March
or
mid-September,
whats
the
minimum
number
of
sales
to
get
on
either
the
nonfiction
list
or
the
fiction
list
for
any
of
these
lists?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
you
know,
thats
an
interesting
question
because
the
New
York
Times
just
changed
their
list
yesterday.
They
added
eight
new
monthly
lists
so
that
they
could
bisect
out
diet
and
health
and
other
things
into
smaller
lists.
So
itll
be
interesting
to
see
what
those
new
numbers
are
going
to
be
as
they
change.
September,
December,
and
January
traditionally
speaking
are
always
verythe
sales
numbers
are
very
high.
Typically
speaking
if
you
want
to
make
the
New
York
Times
list
in
September
youre
gonna
need
to
have
6,500
to
8,500
sales
to
have
a
shot
at
the
bottom
of
the
list.
Typically
speaking
with
my
clients
were
aiming
for
10,000
sales
a
week
so
that
we
can
get
the
middle
of
the
list.
Now
that
being
said,
come
New
Years,
the
first
two
weeks
after
the
first
of
the
years
the
sales
volumes
are
always
high
and
are
usually
going
to
be
in
the
7,500
to
10,000
book
range
to
make
the
bottom
of
the
list.
Michael
Drew:
The
rest
of
the
year
the
numbers
were
looking
at
areon
the
low
end
are
4,500
or
more.
Now
yes,
it
is
possible
in
any
given
week
that
1,000
or
1,500
sales
could
get
you
the
very,
very
bottom
of
the
list,
but
that
is
a
crapshoot
that
if
you
are
aiming
for
youre
really
aiming
for
hope
at
that
point.
Michael
Drew:
Yeah,
yeah.
It
was
a
balance.
And
again,
the
New
York
Times
is
different
than
USA
Today.
At
USA
Today
you
have
enough
reporting
channels;
they
dont
weight
the
retailers.
But
at
the
New
York
Times
they
do.
So
what
theyre
looking
atand
this
changes
from
one
year
to
the
next,
but
theyre
looking
at
the
total
volume
of
sales.
So
if
you
have
a
pie
of
100
percent
and
Amazon
is
the
number
one
retailer
and
they
represent
17
percent
of
all
sales
last
year,
and
the
number
two
retailer
is
Barnes
&
Noble
and
they
represented
12
percent,
theyre
expecting
that
your
sales
at
Amazon
are
roughly
30
percent,
give
or
take,
more
than
Barnes
&
Noble.
Now
if
you
have
Barnes
&
Noble
coming
in
at
1,000
sales
and
Amazon
coming
in
at
750,
that
also
would
raise
a
red
flag
at
the
New
York
Times
because
thats
not
normal
either,
right?
Theyre
weighting
is
based
upon
the
volume
of
salesbased
on
the
overall
pie.
So
Amazon
should
be
the
biggest,
should
be
roughly
30
percent
more
thanat
least
for
this
year
roughly
30
percent
more
than
Barnes
&
Noble.
Barnes
&
Noble
is
about
25
percent
bigger
than
the
next
retailer,
which
is
again
about
10
percent
bigger
than
the
next,
and
so
on
and
so
forth.
James
Altucher:
And
so
how
important
are
these
lists,
do
you
think?
Like,
why
do
you
have
clients
who
want
to
be
on
these
lists?
Like,
what
benefit
is
it,
other
than
just
pure
ego?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
egos
a
big
part
of
it.
My
mentor
and
first
bestselling
author
Roy
H.
Williams
would
say
if
you
eliminate
fear
as
a
motivationso
in
business,
why
would
you
do
something
positive
like
a
bestseller
campaign?
Your
motivations
are
one
of
three
things:
fame,
fortune,
or
making
a
difference,
or
some
combination
of
the
three.
Most
of
my
clientsnot
all,
but
most
of
my
clients
fall
either
into
the
fame
or
the
fortune
category.
Theyre
doing
it
for
a
financial
benefitessentially
theyre
using
the
book
as
a
business
excuse
to
launch
a
new
product
or
a
new
service
or
to
be
able
to
separate
themselves
in
their
category
from
their
competitorsor
theyre
doing
it
for
ego.
I
would
say
that
the
majority
of
my
clients
are
doing
it
for
a
business
reason.
Id
probably
say
60
percent
of
them
are
for
financial
gain,
30
percent
are
for
ego,
and
the
rest
are
for
genuinely
making
a
difference.
But
that
would
be
the
broad
reason
why
someone
would
want
to
do
it.
Now
what
Ill
tell
you
isand
this
is
a
dirty
little
secretthe
benefit
of
doing
a
bestseller
campaign
isnt
in
appearing
on
the
list.
There
is
benefit
there.
Im
not
saying
that
thats
not
true,
and
if
you
live
outside
of
North
America
there
is
still
a
huge
intrinsic
value
of
being
a
New
York
Times
bestseller.
And
when
I
started
in
this
industry
as
a
publisher
17
years
ago,
being
a
New
York
Times
bestseller
was
huge.
Betweenjust
to
give
you
some
context,
between
1880
to
1980
the
average
number
of
books
published
each
year
was
40,000
unique
titles.
Last
year
there
were
1,076,000
books
published.
Michael
Drew:
That
means
there
were
more
books
published
last
year
than
there
were
books
published
between
1950
to
1980.
Michael
Drew:
It
is.
Its
because
of
self-publishing.
Its
because
of
digital
publishing.
The
world
is
now
our
oyster
because
of
technology.
Whats
interesting
isand
the
thing
with
what
happened
in
1980
was
personal
word
processing.
We
could
now
start
writing
books
on
a
word
processor
versus
having
to
handwrite
them
out,
and
that
made
a
big
difference
in
terms
of
the
number
of
people
who
thought
they
could
write
a
book.
So
what
happens
with
the
bestseller
list
is
as
weveas
more
books
have
been
published,
the
focus
has
gone
from
the
value
of
the
content
of
the
book
to
the
authors
ability
to
market
the
book.
The
average
retail
bookstore
only
carries
100,000
unique
titles.
Of
those
100,000
unique
titles,
between
70
to
80
percent
are
what
we
call
backless
titles,
which
are
your
perennials,
your
classics,
and
last
years
bestsellers.
What
that
means
is
of
the
1,076,000
books
published
last
year,
only
20,000
to
30,000
of
them
made
it
onto
a
retail
bookstore
shelf.
And
while
its
true
digital
publishing
is
increasing
in
terms
of
the
number
of
sales
they
have
each
year,
if
you
took
all
books
sold
through
an
electronic
format,
be
that
a
printed
book
like
a
hardback
book
or
paperback
book
sold
through
Amazon.com
or
BarnesAndNoble.com
or
a
book
sold
through
Kindle
or
iPad
or
Nook
or
Kobo,
they
only
represented
36
percent
of
all
books
sold
last
year.
That
means
that
those
brick
and
mortar
stores
as
a
whole
still
sell
more
books
today
than
all
of
the
electronically-
sold
books
combined.
And
so
what
you
have
in
this
game,
if
youd
like
to
look
at
it
that
way,
is
the
need
to
be
able
to
get
that
retail
shelf
space.
Now
I
predict
in
the
next
five
years
that
that
will
reverse
and
well
sell
more
books
electronically
and
online,
but
today
the
name
of
the
game
is
still
that
brick
and
mortar
distribution.
So
what
youre
looking
at
is
the
need
to
be
able
to
get
your
book
onto
the
retail
bookstore
shelf
and
play
with
a
publisher
in
a
way
that
will
maximize
the
distribution
of
your
book.
And
what
publishersbecause
theres
so
much
competition
for
so
little
shelf
space,
what
publishers
are
looking
for
is
how
they
can
best
sell
their
books
to
the
buyers
at
Barnes
&
Noble
and
Books-a-Million
and
Hudsons
and
beyond.
And
note,
Barnes
&
Noble
has
12
buyers.
They
have
12
people
that
make
the
decision
on
how
many
copies
of
different
books
theyre
going
to
carry
on
their
shelf.
And
so
you
have
a
situation
where
the
buyers
at
Barnes
&
Noble,
they
dont
read
the
books.
They
only
care
about
how
many
copies
of
the
book
theyre
going
to
sell.
So
what
theyre
looking
at
is
past
sales
history,
and
theyre
looking
at
the
marketing
of
the
bookcover
and
other
things
make
a
big
difference
there.
But
literally
the
ability
to
market
the
book
isin
the
book
marketing
and
publishing
games
is
the
most
important
thing,
the
ability
to
drive
traffic
into
stores
to
sell
the
book.
James
Altucher:
Michael,
Im
so
grateful
you
were
able
to
kind
of
shed
so
much
light
on
the
publishing
industry.
This
isyou
know,
Ive
written
13
books.
This
is
more
information
in
a
short
period
of
time
than
Ive
ever
had
before
on
the
mechanics
of
publishing,
the
bestseller
lists,
and
all
aspects
of
the
industry,
including
kind
of
the
numbers
you
just
shared
of
how
many
books
are
in
a
bookstore,
how
many
books
were
published
last
year,
and
so
on.
You
shouldare
you
writing
a
book
on
publishing?
Michael
Drew:
You
know
what?
Theres
not
a
huge
demand
for
a
book
on
publishing.
I
do
have
a
whitepaper
that
Ive
written
titled
How
to
Publish
a
Bestselling
Book
that
goes
into
a
lot
of
the
numbers
that
weve
gone
through
here
plus
a
lot
of
the
machinations
of
how
publishing
actually
mechanically
works
and
how
to
play
within
publishing.
So
we
do
have
that
as
a
whitepaper.
James
Altucher:
So
where
canhow
can
we
help
you?
Where
can
people
go
to
find
you?
What
would
you
like
people
to
look
at?
Share
some
info.
Michael
Drew:
Cool.
So
the
marketing
agency
that
I
own
is
called
Promote
a
Book,
and
so
our
website
is
that
easy;
its
PromoteABook.com.
And
we
have
a
blog,
and
our
blog
sheds
quite
a
bit
of
information
on
the
reality
of
publishing
and
how
to
properly
and
successfully
publish
and
promote
your
book,
and
our
blog
is
at
BeneathTheCover.com.
And
we
have
a
newsletter
that
we
call
the
Midweek
Missive.
If
you
sign
up
for
that
on
BeneathTheCover.com
we
give
as
a
thank-you
the
How
to
Publish
a
Bestselling
Book
whitepaper.
James Altucher: And anything else you want to kind of get people to or promote?
Michael
Drew:
Well,
[laughter]
you
know,
the
big
thing
is
reallyyou
know,
I
own
the
marketing
agency.
As
a
side
note,
and
perhaps
we
could
have
this
as
a
conversation
in
the
future,
Roy
Williams
and
I
have
been
researchers
or
marketing
and
cultural
movements,
and
we
have
done
seminal
research
on
the
swing
of
society
from
one
ideology
to
another,
from
the
ideology
every
40
years
of
me
to
an
ideology
of
we,
and
back
from
we
to
me,
and
what
that
means
both
culturally
and
from
a
business
standpoint.
If
youre
interested
or
if
your
listeners
are
interested
we
have
more
information
on
that
over
at
PendulumInAction.com.
Ive
been
invited
to
speak
at
Harvard
three
times
on
that
specific
subject.
So
if
youre
interested
in
understanding
cultural
swings
orand
how
that
applies
to
marketing
and
how
to
have
a
competitive
advantage,
go
visit
PendulumInAction.com.
James
Altucher:
Well,
okay,
so
last
quick
question,
and
yes
or
no.
Are
we
inor
not
yes
or
no,
but
are
we
in
a
me
or
a
we?
Period.
Michael
Drew:
Well,
if
you
want
a
short
answer
the
answer
is
we.
We
shifted
in
2003
from
a
me
into
a
we.
We
will
be
in
this
we
cycle
until
2043.
Right
now
we
are
on
the
upswing
of
the
we.
We
are
starting
to
take
we
too
far,
and
there
are
some
dangerous
cultural
things
with
that.
From
a
business
standpoint
what
that
means
is
we
are
heading
into
20-year
micro-cycle
of
witch
hunts.
In
business
what
we
need
to
do
is
replace
our
unique
selling
proposition
with
a
statement
of
what
we
stand
against.
And
by
2033
well
have
taken
we
so
far
that
the
youth
of
society
will
reject
taking
we
too
far
and
will
become
the
gravity
that
pulls
us
from
we
back
into
me.
James
Altucher:
Well,
this
is
all
extremely
fascinating,
Michael.
Thanks
for
joining
us
on
Ask
Altucher.
James
Altucher:
A
lot
of
incredibly
useful
information
that
I
know
people
will
make
use
of.
And
good
luck
with
everything.
Michael Drew: Thanks, I really appreciate it. I look forward to chatting with you soon.
James
Altucher:
Okay,
so,
Tucker,
welcome
back.
This
is
also
the
first
time
not
only
are
you
the
first
repeat
guest,
this
is
the
first
I'm
having
having
back-to-back
episodes
with
a
guy.
James
Altucher:
So
I
wanna
talk
about
totally
different
subject.
Last
episode
we
talked
about
fatherhood,
and
you
were,
like,
somehow
a
world's
expert
on
having
a
baby.
And
now
I
wanna
talk
about
the
book
publishing
business
because
you,
more
than
just
about
anybody
I
know,
know
more
about
book
publishing.
I'm
just
gonna
tell
a
little
story.
So
I
was
at
Tim
Ferriss'
launch.
He
had
this
dinner
launch
for
The
4-Hour
Chef,
and
I
was
talking
to
him
just
in
general
about
how
I
wanted
to
kind
of
professionally
I
didn't
wanna
just
self-publish
the
normal
way.
I
wanted
to
professionally
self-publish
so
that
almost
as
if
I
was
pouring
my
own
publishing
company.
And
Tim
yells
out
to
someone,
"Hey,
e-mail
Tucker's
post
on
this
to
James."
So
I
got
the
post,
and
I
already
knew
you
from
e-mails,
but
then
Claudia
and
I
flew
down
to
Austin,
hung
out
with
you
and
really
kinda
mapped
out
the
process
that
became
Choose
Yourself.
So
I
wrote
it's
a
little
different
than
so
now
you're
doing
a
business
Book
in
a
Box,
which
is
a
little
bit
different
than
what
we
did
'cause
I
wrote
Choose
Yourself,
but
describe
Book
in
a
Box,
and
you
just
started
this
and
it's
you
just
told
me
offline,
since
you
started
it
in
August,
it's
made
$360,000
_____.
Tucker
Max:
No,
no,
no,
no,
no.
Actually
more.
So
we
did
$200,000
the
first
two
months.
We
probably
did
that
LinkedIn
post
is
gonna
make
us
anywhere
between
$250,000
and
$400,000
in
revenue.
So
we're
gonna
be
over
$500,000
for
the
year
the
first
six
months.
James
Altucher:
So
describe
the
business
and
then
let's
talk
and
also,
just
in
general,
I
wanna
talk
about
publishing
with
you,
but
discuss
this
business
first.
What
is
this
business?
Tucker
Max:
All
right.
So
Book
in
a
Box
is
very
simple.
It
is
essentially
it's
kind
of
a
new
way
to
write
a
book.
For
ten
years,
I've
met
people
who
have
come
up
to
me,
"Oh,
you're
an
author.
I
have
a
great
idea
for
a
book."
I'm
sure
you
hear
this
all
the
time,
right?
James
Altucher:
Everybody
wants
to
co-author
or,
you
know,
it's
those
are
the
only
thing
like
I
have
nothing
else
to
do
with
my
time.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Let
me
coast
off
your
success
for
my
book.
No,
but
people
always
ask
me
how
do
I
become
an
author?
How
do
I
get
a
book?
How
do
I
get
published,
right?
And
so
and
then
I
start
usually
explaining
the
process
and
their,
like,
eyes
glaze
over
'cause
no
one
wants
to
do
the
work.
Everyone
wants
a
book
but
no
one
wants
to
do
any
of
the
work,
right.
James
Altucher:
And
it's
hard
work.
Like,
sitting
you
know,
slouched
over
a
computer
for,
let's
call
it,
a
year
is
not
fun
is
not
a
fun
activity.
It's
not
a
you
know,
we're
used
to
hunting
for
food.
We're
not
used
to
sitting
over
a
computer,
and
you
get
that
fight
or
flight,
but
you
can't
fight
or
flight;
you're
just
sitting
in
front
of
a
computer.
Tucker
Max:
It's
a
very
unusual
emotional
and
sort
of
neurological
process,
right.
It's
very
specific
and
it's
a
very
specific
skill,
and
some
people
are
very
good
at
it,
but
most
people
aren't.
James
Altucher:
And
on
that
point,
how
many
New
York
Times
bestsellers
do
you
have?
Tucker
Max:
Right.
I
have
some
idea
what
it
means
to
be
a
good
writer.
The
only
three
people
to
ever
have
three
books
on
the
New
York
Times
bestseller
list
at
one
time,
nonfiction,
are
me,
Malcolm
Gladwell
and
Michael
Lewis.
Tucker
Max:
At
the
same
time.
Three
books
at
the
same
time
on
the
list.
Only
three
of
us.
And
so
right.
I
have
an
idea
of
what
I'm
talking
about
when
it
comes
to
writing,
and
so
anyway,
like,
it's
funny.
I
never
define
myself
as
a
writer,
but
when
people
ask
me
that
question
how
do
I
you
know,
how
do
I
get
a
book,
then
I
always,
like
I
kinda
get
a
little
snobby
and
elitish.
Well,
you
have
to
write
it
and
you
have
to
do
this
and
you
have
to
do
that
and
it's,
like,
the
work
and
the
hard
work
and
the
process,
and
that's
really
the
cultural
narrative.
If
you
look
at
anything
at
all
about
books
or
writing
books
or
publishing,
it's
like
everyone
emphasizes
how
hard
it
has
to
be.
First
off,
because
it
is
a
hard
process.
But
then,
I
think
there's
a
narrative
in
sort
of
publishing
in
the
publishing
sort
of
informational
system
or
the
publishing
media
that,
like,
the
more
you
suffer,
the
more
valid
your
art
is
or
whatever,
which
of
course
is
total
bullshit,
but
whatever.
James
Altucher:
And
by
the
way,
book
writing
doesn't
have
to
be
art.
I
would
say
there's
also
only
a
handful
of
writers
who
are
artistically
writing.
Tucker
Max:
I
don't
really
make
the
distinction.
I
think
if
you're
expressing
yourself
and
create
a
medium,
it's
art.
James
Altucher:
But
a
lotta
people
wanna
kind
of
pass
on
information
but
they
might
not
have
had
the
experience
writing,
and
so
they're
good
at
passing
on
the
information
but
it
might
not
be
like,
you
might
not
_____
I
just
read
the
most
beautiful
prose
or
____.
Tucker
Max:
But
why
is
that
not
art?
I
mean,
like,
you
know,
listen.
David
Foster
Wallace
maybe
is
a
much
better
a
much
more
beautiful
sentence
crafter
than
I
am,
but
why
is
his
stuff
art
and
mine
isn't?
Or
just
for
example?
James
Altucher:
I
would
actually
say
the
reverse,
but
that's
another
discussion.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
I
think
it's
all
art.
Some
of
it
is
maybe
good
art
or
bad
art
or
some
of
it
is
high
art
or
whatever.
I
know
what
you're
saying,
though.
So
most
people
don't
read
for
art.
They
read
for
information,
right.
But
anyway,
so
I
used
to
kind
of
give
people
the
answer,
"Oh,
you've
gotta
put
in
the
work,"
and
whatever.
And
that's
the
narrative
is
that,
like,
this
is
a
hard
process,
right.
And
I
think
a
lot
of
writers
say
that
because
first
off,
they
like
their
identity.
They
like
the
exclusivity
of
being
a
writer,
right,
that
it's
hard
to
get
a
book
deal,
it's
hard
to
get
anyone
to
buy
your
book.
It's
a
hard
thing
to
do,
so
if
I'm
in
the
club,
it
makes
me
better
than
other
people.
There's
really
a
snobby
sort
of
elitism
to
it.
And
I
fully
fell
in
that
camp
for
years,
right.
And
about,
I
don't
know,
six
months
ago,
or
a
little
bit
more,
eight
months,
I
was
at
an
entrepreneur
dinner
in
New
York,
the
LDV
sort
of
series,
and
Tucker
Max:
I
forget
what
it
stands
for.
Evan
Nisselson
runs
it.
It's
like
a
sort
of
like
an
invite-only
I
should
introduce
you
to
Evan.
I
can't
believe
I
haven't.
I'm
kind
of
embarrassed.
I
know.
You
two
would
love
each
other.
He's,
like,
a,
you
know,
a
mentor,
500
start-ups,
he
has
his
own
VC
or
angel
fund.
He's,
you
know,
exited
a
bunch
of
companies.
He's
a
really
cool
dude.
He's
sort
of
like,
maybe
not
quite,
but
like
the
Ron
Conway
of
New
York,
right.
Not
quite
that
big,
but
a
connector.
Very
much
of
that
type
of
person.
And
so
I
forget
how
I
met
him,
but
he
invited
me
to
one
of
the
dinners,
and
at
the
dinner,
you
know,
he
introduced
me
as
a
publishing
guy,
sort
of
like
what
you
did.
And
so
one
of
the
female
entrepreneurs
his
dinners
are
really
cool
too
'cause
they're
always
50/50
split
50
percent
women,
50
percent
men.
And
so
one
of
the
women
came
up
to
me
after
the,
like,
the
little
intros.
She's,
like,
"Hey,
I
wanna
write
a
book.
You
know,
can
you
help
me?"
I'm,
like,
"Yeah,
of
course."
And
so,
like,
long,
long
story
short,
she
basically
like,
she
doesn't
have
the
time
to
write
a
book,
and
she
kinda
tried
to
figure
out
the
self-publishing
and
the
traditional
publishing
process
and
she's,
like,
they're
both
ridiculously
complex
and
nonsensical
and
this
is
a
mess.
James
Altucher:
Right.
Unless
you
put
in
like
with
self-publishing,
this
is
why
I
was
this
is
why
I
originally
came
to
that
question
when
we
went
down
to
Austin.
To
professionally
self-publish
is
1,000
percent
different
than
self-publishing
and
1,000
percent
different
than
traditional
publishing.
And
very
few
people
have
done
it
like,
I've
done
it.
Like,
I
don't
know
other
people
who
have
____.
Tucker
Max:
There
are
a
few
others,
but
you're
one
of
the
shining
examples
of
professional
self-publishing.
James
Altucher:
I
would
say
I
don't
know
if
you
call
it
this
but,
like,
with
Sloppy
Seconds,
your
book,
was
that
sort
of
a
high-end
professional
self-publishing.
Tucker
Max:
A
hybrid.
Yeah,
sort
of
a
hybrid,
yeah.
Well,
I
mean,
like,
you
know,
like
well,
we
can
talk
about
my
publishing
company
and
what
I
did
with
Simon
a
little
bit
later,
but
so
basically,
like,
she
wanted
she's
smart,
she
had
good
ideas,
and
she
wanted
a
book,
but
she
didn't
wanna
go
through
the
normal
book
process,
right.
And
so,
of
course,
you
know,
I
start
I
give
her
my
little
canned
speech
about,
"Well,
writing,
you
gotta
sit
down
and
do
the
work,"
and
blah,
blah,
blah,
and
she
rolls
her
eyes
at
me,
right.
Like,
not
like
her
eyes
didn't
glaze
over
like,
you
know,
like
she
wasn't
listening.
She
straight
up
rolled
her
eyes
at
me.
Tucker
Max:
She
did,
and
she
goes
I'll
never
forget
it.
She's,
like,
"I'm
an
entrepreneur.
You're
an
entrepreneur,
right."
And
I'm,
like,
"Yeah,
of
course."
She's,
like,
"Well,
in
my
role,
or
in
my
job,
I
solve
problems.
That's
what
makes
me
an
entrepreneur.
Can
you
solve
my
problem
or
not?"
I
was,
like
Tucker
Max:
Right.
So
actually,
I
think
her
exact
quote
was,
"Can
you
solve
my
problem
or
just
lecture
me
about
hard
work?"
And
I
was,
like,
______,
like
well,
the
funny
thing
is
'cause
she's
right.
Like,
this
woman
is
extraordinarily
her
name's
Melissa
Gonzalez.
She
runs,
like,
a
pop-up
retail
consultant
company,
Lion'esque
Group
or
something.
Very
successful.
She's,
like,
won
Clio
Awards
and,
like,
made
all
this
money
and
done
all
this
crazy
cool
stuff,
right.
And
so
she's
a
baller,
right.
She's
not
just
some
schmoe.
And
so,
like,
I
was,
like,
"All
right,
fuck."
So,
like,
I
was
kinda
embarrassed
at
the
time,
and
so
I
couldn't
really
you
can't
think
when
you're
embarrassed.
So,
like,
I
went
home,
and
a
couple
weeks,
like,
I
couldn't
get
past,
like,
how
do
I
get
her
a
book
without
her
writing
it.
And
then
eventually
it
dawned
on
me.
I
was,
like,
"Well,
fuck,
what
if
I
just
interview
her?
What
if
she
just
talks
her
idea
out?
That
doesn't
take
long
at
all."
And
the
reason
I
knew
this
doesn't
take
long
well,
I
can't
talk
about
who
it
was,
but
I
was
supposed
to
do,
like,
a
I
was
supposed
to
be
a
co-writer
on
the
memoir
of
a
really,
really
big
celebrity.
I'll
tell
you
who
off
air,
but
I
actually
signed
an
NDA.
I
really
'cause
I
got
paid
and
they
didn't
do
the
book,
and
I
really
truthfully
can't
say
or
they'll
come
take
all
my
money.
They
cut
me
a
big
check,
so
I
don't
wanna
do
that.
So
I
researched
this
a
lot.
Like,
I
talked
to
Neil
Strauss
about
this
'cause
he's
kind
of
done,
like,
all
the
big
ones
in
that
space,
and
you
can
usually
get
someone's
full
life
story
no
more
than
40
hours,
usually
20
hours,
right.
And
so
you're
talking
about
a
nonfiction
book
half
that
time,
maybe
ten
hours.
I
mean,
if
you're
talking
James
Altucher:
So
what
people
need
to
know,
then,
is
the
James
Altucher
needs
to
know
the
exact
questions
so
it's
20
hours
instead
of
40.
Tucker
Max:
Exactly.
So
that's
why
so
what
I
thought
was,
all
right,
let
me
outline
her
book.
Let's
figure
out,
like,
let
me
get
her
idea
clear,
what
she
wants
to
say
very
clear,
which
is
basically
an
outline
for
the
interview,
and
then
interview
her
over
the
course
of,
like,
eight
to
ten
hours,
right.
And
usually
normal
talking,
people
can,
with
a
good
outline
and
good
James
Altucher,
can
get
about
8,000
words
an
hour.
So
ten
hours
is
80,000
words.
That's
way
bigger
than
her
book
needs
to
be,
right.
So
it's
more
than
enough
time.
So
I
called
her
up
and
I'm,
like,
"Look.
What
if
I
told
you
we
can
take
you
from
your
idea
all
the
way
through
to
professionally
published
finished
book
on
Amazon,
everything
done,
in
twelve
hours
of
your
time?"
She's,
like,
"Are
you
kidding?
Done."
And
we
like,
I
forget
what
we
charged
her.
It
was
less
than
what
we're
charging
now,
but
not
much
less,
maybe
like
$10,000
or
something.
And
said,
all
right,
like,
let's
do
it.
James
Altucher:
And
just
to
be
clear,
this
is
important
to
her
because
it's
one
thing
if
you
hand
your
business
card
out
at
a
dinner;
it's
another
thing
if
you
hand
somebody
a
book
with
all
your
curated
life
in
the
book.
Like,
this
is
me.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Well,
so
the
process
I'm
about
to
outline,
you
can
do
for
really
cheap.
We
just
charged
her
a
lot
because
she
has
a
lot
of
money
and
no
time,
right,
so
that's
why
she's
paying
us.
James
Altucher:
To
be
fair,
like,
I
know
the
designer
you
use.
We
still
use
her
for
books.
James
Altucher:
I
know
the
editors.
I
know
your
whole
team,
so
it's
you
provide
value
where
there's
value.
Tucker
Max:
Well,
the
fact
what
you're
paying
for
with
us
is
our
expertise
and
the
fact
that
you
only
have
to
spend
twelve
hours
on
it.
Like,
you're
paying
for
time,
right.
Time
and
expertise.
So
what
we
did
is,
like,
we
did
the
outline,
came
out
really
good,
and
then
did
the
interviews
and
recorded
the
interviews,
sent
the
interviews
to,
like,
SpeechPad
to
get
transcribed,
right,
which
is,
like,
$1.00
a
minute.
Transcribed
all
of
them.
It
was,
I
think
maybe
a
60,000-word
manuscript
when
we
were
done.
And
of
course,
if
you've
ever
seen
a
transcribed
audio
recording,
it's
gibberish.
You
can't
read
it.
Like,
it's
a
totally
different
thing.
All
these
ums
and
uhs
and
likes
and
thoughts
go
different
places
that
when
you
listen
to
make
total
sense
don't
make
sense
on
the
page.
So
we
took
that
60,000-word
manuscript,
handed
it
to
an
editor
friend
of
ours.
She
went
through
it,
basically
same
words,
same
ideas,
same
concepts,
just
turned
it
into
book
prose,
right.
So
she
didn't
rewrite
it,
she
didn't
write
it.
It's
Melissa's
ideas
and
her
words
and
her
text,
and
she's
got
the
outline
so
she
knows
exactly
what
she's
trying
to
say.
She
just
makes
the
sentences
read
well
then
the
paragraphs
and
then
the
pages
and
she's
done.
It
only
took
her,
like,
two
days
to
turn
60,000
words
into,
like,
45,000
words
of
finished
manuscript,
and
it
was
great.
I
mean,
it
was
fantastic.
It
was
amazing
and
Melissa
was
super
happy.
I'm
kinda
speeding
up
the
process.
There
were
other
little
things.
And
then
we
did
all
the
other
stuff.
James
Altucher:
Like
what
other
little
things?
Tucker
Max:
Okay,
so
it
took
one
other
round
of
content
edits
at
the
end
because
we
hadn't
refined
our
outlining
process.
Now
we
have
our
outlining
process
really
tight.
Like,
if
I
showed
you
it's
almost
an
algorithmic
process.
Like,
you
can
plug
in
anyone
smart
into
our
process
and
they
can
nail
it
first
step.
James Altucher: What's an example of, like, the things in your outline?
Tucker
Max:
So
we
actually
have
a
set
of
questions
that
we
ask
people
to
get
the
we
know
where
they
have
to
get,
right,
and
so
we
know
what
questions
get
most
people
there.
Some
people
come
in
and
they're
fuckin'
sharp
and
they're
smart
and
they
know
exactly
what
their
book
is
about,
they
know
exactly
what
they
wanna
say,
so
the
outline
is
essentially
just
putting
shit
in
order,
really
simple.
Some
people
come
in
like,
I'm
working
on
one
book
now,
even
though,
like,
I'm
the
CEO,
part
of
the
rule
of
our
company
so
far
is
that
all
the
employees
sort
of
like
in
the
Marines.
Every
Marine's
first
job
is
to
put
lead
on
target.
You've
gotta
be
able
to
shoot
first,
then
you
do
your
job,
logistics
or
trucking
or
infantry,
whatever,
right.
Our
company's
the
same
way.
Our
goal
is
to
create
great
books,
help
people
create
great
books,
and
so
everyone
has
to
work
on
some
part
of
the
process,
regardless
of
what
your
job
in
the
company
is.
You've
gotta
be
good
at
outlining
or
editing,
right.
And
so
we
all
work
on
books
because
there's
no
other
better
way
to
understand
the
process
and
to
get
good
at
it
and
to
make
it
really
work
well.
So
I'm
working
with
this
one
dude
James
Altucher:
And
I
think
also,
just
to
add,
like,
as
a
CEO,
like,
I
have
a
sign
next
to
my
computer,
which
Claudia
actually
had
me
write,
which
is
"Remove
myself
from
the
equation."
So
every
project
I
get
involved
in,
my
first
goal
to
the
end
is
to
remove
myself
as
much
as
possible
from
the
equation,
which
means
everybody
else
has
to
take
up
the
different
parts
of
the
equation.
So
it
sounds
like
that's
what
you're
trying
to
do
with
_____.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah,
we're
trying
to,
but
we
also
eat
our
own
dog
food.
You
know,
so,
like,
I'm
writing
a
book
now,
how
to
write
a
book
in
twelve
hours,
which
is
essentially
our
process,
and
I'm
using
the
Book
in
a
Box
process
to
write
the
book
about
the
Book
in
a
Box
process,
right,
which
is
sorta
like
James
Altucher:
Right,
meta.
It's
like
The
Comeback
on
HBO.
Tucker
Max:
Well,
it's
like
using
a
lathe
to
make
a
lathe,
you
know,
like
a
machine
to
make
a
machine,
right.
So
anyway,
so
yeah.
So
what
I
was
saying
is,
like
Tucker
Max:
Right.
We
did
content
edits
because,
like,
the
outlining
process
really
is
the
key.
If
you
get
the
outline
right,
everything
else
is
really
easy.
If
you
screw
the
outline
up,
then
sort
of
like
garbage
in,
garbage
out.
It
becomes
shitty
later
on.
James
Altucher:
Okay,
so
then
you
were
saying
you
were
working
on
a
book
right
now
where
this
is
in
the
outline.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Well,
this
one
guy
I'm
talking
to,
he's
sort
of
like
a
real
estate
inspirational
speaker
type,
and
he
actually
has
really
good
ideas
and
he's
a
really
smart
guys.
He's
just
really
scatterbrained.
He's
very
dyslexic
and
he's
very
he
thinks
in
a
very
speech
way,
not
a
writer
writing
way,
right.
So
I
have
to,
like,
translate
his
ideas
to
a
clear
sort
of
order,
right,
and
put
them
into
not
just
an
order
but
also
a
pattern
and
make
them
work
in
a
book.
All
the
content's
there,
it's
just
the
outline
process
is
very
difficult
with
him.
It's
just
more
time
consuming.
It's
not
really
that
hard.
It's
just
time
consuming,
right.
And
so
we
what
we're
doing
is
developing
a
pretty
clear
set
of
questions
and
then
that
help
the
person
who
does
the
outline
'cause
we
use
almost
all
freelancers,
right.
It's
not
I
am
being
taken
out
of
the
equation,
but
the
process
has
to
be
set
really,
really
well
before
we
can
insert
freelancers,
right.
James Altucher: Like what's an example question you would ask this real estate guy?
Tucker
Max:
So
okay,
so
it's
sort
of
like
what's
your
book
what
is
your
book
about?
Who
do
you
envision
the
audience
being?
What
value
do
you
envision
your
audience
taking
from
this?
Why
do
you
think
they're
gonna
take
this
value?
Like,
things
like
that,
like
very
sort
of
questions
that
really
get
to
the
heart
of
what
is
this
person
saying?
How
are
they
saying
it?
Who
is
it
for?
And,
like,
what
are
the
really
important
parts
of
what
they're
saying,
right?
And
so
you'd
kinda
have
to
look
at
all
the
docs
to
understand,
but
it's
kind
of
a
pattern,
a
set
of
questions
we
kind
of
give
to
our
freelancers
to
ask,
right,
and
we've
learned
these
over
working
with,
you
know,
bunches
of
clients
now,
which
questions
get
to
the
core
of
it.
Another
example
is
like,
for
instance
so
we
have
the
same
thing
for
interviewing,
right.
So
for
example,
like,
we
have
a
couple
meta
rules.
If
someone's
being
very
general,
ask
them
for
a
specific
example.
If
someone's
only
giving
specific
examples,
ask
them
for
what
the
general
rule
is
or
application.
There's,
like,
ten
of
those
things,
right,
that
really
help
the
sort
of
interviewing
freelancers
go
through
it.
And,
James,
you
wouldn't
believe.
We
have
such
high
quality
freelancers.
I
mean,
we've
got,
like,
people
who
used
to
be,
like,
feature
reporters
at
the
Washington
Post
and,
like,
it's
actually
easy
to
get
super
high
quality
freelancers.
James
Altucher:
So
is
that
a
statement
on
media
in
general?
Like
how
the
media
landscape
has
basically
shut
down
or
turned
upside
down?
Tucker
Max:
No,
it's
changing
a
lot,
and
there's
a
lot
of
people
what
we
found
is
the
freelancers
who
do
really
good
jobs
for
us
are
ones
who
used
to
do
specific
jobs
in
old
media,
and
those
jobs
have
changed
a
lot
or
gone
away
because
we
can
pay
them
really
good.
Like,
we
can
take
someone,
like
a
Washington
the
former
Washington
Post
reporter,
and
we'll
assign
I
think
it's
a
her
actually
we'll
assign
her
to
a
book,
and
she'll
spend
so
the
outlining
is
done
separately
from
the
interviewing-editing.
Interviewing-
editing
is
one
job,
freelance
job.
So
what
she'll
do
is
she'll
spend
eight
hours
on
the
phone
with
someone
doing
all
the
interviews
and
then
someone
else
SpeechPad
we
actually
don't
we
use
a
different
service
now,
but
a
service
transcribes
it.
She
gets
a
transcript
back
and
she
edits
it
into
a
book,
right.
It
really
takes
her
about
20
hours
total,
right,
and
we're
paying
a
good
four-figure
sum
to
her.
So
she's,
like,
out
of
her
mind
excited
'cause
basically
three
to
four
effective
work
days,
she's
making,
you
know,
$2,000;
$3,000;
$4,000,
right,
and
it's,
like,
amazing
for
her,
and
she
can
do
four
of
those
a
month,
you
know,
or
even
more.
You
know,
like,
if
she
really
wants
to
work
hard,
she
can
do
ten
a
month
and
she
can
make
a
six-figure
income
from
us
easily
and
do
it
from
home
and
do
work
she
really
likes
doing
and
help
people
do
really
cool
stuff,
you
know
what
I'm
saying.
So
we're
getting
really,
really
high
quality
freelancers.
They're
not
cheap,
but
they're
not
crazy
expensive
either.
You
know,
it's
not
like
ghost
writing
is
$40,000
to
start
for
even
a
mediocre
ghost
writer.
Someone
like
Nils
Parker
is
$75,000
now
or
something
as
a
ghost
writer.
Tucker
Max:
Because
they
don't
have
a
process.
The
quality
is
all
over
the
place.
Some
of
them
are
amazing
and
some
are
crap.
James
Altucher:
And
I
think
that
was
the
criticisms
in
your
the
comments
on
your
article
on
LinkedIn
about
this.
Everyone
says,
"Well,
isn't
this
a
ghost
writing
service?"
It's
totally
not.
It's
the
words
of
the
person.
But
now,
here's
the
question.
When
you
have,
let's
say,
that
final
45,000-word
document,
do
you
do
any
kind
of,
like,
content
twists,
like
put
a
at
the
end
of
one
chapter,
tease
the
next
chapter,
you
know,
have
any
kind
of
cliffhangers?
Tucker
Max:
We
have
a
few
things
like,
we
have
a
pretty
good
pattern
for
the
introduction,
you
know.
Like
for
so
we
have
a
different
sort
of
outline
structure
for
three
different
types
of
books.
We
only
do
nonfiction.
I
think
we're
gonna
develop
a
process
for
fiction.
I'm
actually
meeting
with
a
guy
in
New
York
when
I'm
here
who
I
think
is
gonna
be
the
dude
who's
gonna
help
us
develop
our
fiction
process
'cause
it's
totally
different.
But
we
have
three
different
types.
There's
sort
of
how-to
advice,
right.
That's
one
type
of
nonfiction.
There's
sort
of
memoir
autobiography
type.
That's
another
type
of
nonfiction
book.
And
then
the
third
type
is
sort
of
like
argumentation,
like
making
an
argument
or,
like,
raising
awareness,
right.
And
they're
very
different
types
of
books,
and
each
one
has
a
different
outline
structure,
but,
like,
each
one
is,
like,
okay,
like,
an
introduction
for
a
how-to
book.
You'll
wanna
start
with
something
that
grabs
the
reader
right
away,
a
really
interesting
first
sentence.
Then,
like,
the
coolest
story
from
the
book
is
the
first
thing.
And
then,
like,
after
that,
you
kinda
lay
out
James
Altucher:
I
see.
So
you're
using
your
experience,
really,
in
what
makes
a
good
book
to
basically
motivate
this
outline
process.
So
that's
what
they're
paying
Tucker
Max:
Oh
yes.
Like
I
told
you,
expertise
and
time.
We're
not
just
they're
not
just
talking
and
we
turn
it
into
sentences.
That's
bullshit.
You
can
pay
a
monkey
$500
to
do
that.
We
are
taking
our
expertise
in
knowing
how
to
structure
books
and
how
to
structure
ideas
James
Altucher:
How
to
structure
potentially
a
bestselling
book.
Tucker
Max:
How
to
turn
ideas
into
good
book
structure
which
then
becomes
books.
Here's
the
thing.
If
your
ideas
are
really
stupid,
then
we
can
help
you
get
a
really
well-
structured,
really
beautifully-designed
professional
book
that
has
stupid
content.
If
your
content
is
great,
you're
gonna
have
a
great
book.
Top
to
bottom,
it's
gonna
be
an
amazing
book.
Like,
you
have
great
ideas.
You
now
have
a
great
book
with
Choose
Yourself.
It's
the
same
basic
process.
Tucker
Max:
No,
you
didn't
use
this
process.
You
are
the
last
person
that
it
would
make
sense
to
use
this
process
'cause
you're
such
a
prolific
writer.
Our
process
is
not
for
people
who
enjoy
writing
or
are
good
at
writing
or
like
writing.
It's
for
people
who
have
ideas
that
they
wanna
turn
into
books
but
don't
have
the
time
or
ability
to
sit
through
the
writing
process
or
deal
with
the
publishing
process.
James Altucher: But then I did use your designers and editors.
James Altucher: They were great. And I still use Erin Tyler.
James
Altucher:
She
just
did
the
Choose
Yourself
Guide
to
Wealth
for
us,
and
she
just
did
Becoming
an
Idea
Machine
in
180
Days
for
Claudia.
James
Altucher:
It's
we're
gonna
frame
it.
It's
a
work
of
art.
Tucker
Max:
It
really
is.
It's
great.
She
did
the
she
does
she
doesn't
do
all
we
have
kinda
two
packages,
$15,000
and
$25,000,
and
so
$15,000's
relatively
basic.
It's
for
someone
who
has
a
great
idea,
they
know
exactly
what
they
want,
they
just
want
us
to
do
all
the
work.
$25,000
is
a
lot
more
guidance,
more
content
editing,
things
like
that.
Like,
it's
just
more
time,
right.
And
then
we
do
some
marketing
at
the
end,
basic
stuff,
nothing
really
sophisticated.
But
yeah,
like,
I
basically
I'm
taking
all
the
people
all
the
things
I
know
that
you
have
to
do
to
do
a
great
book
and
I'm
creating
a
process
where
almost
anyone
can
walk
through
it
and
do
it
as
a
process.
James
Altucher:
And
then
you
bring
it
so
then
you
do,
obviously,
the
design.
Do
you
do
audiobooks
for
them?
Tucker
Max:
We
that's
a
separate
thing.
It's
a
separate
service.
It's
an
add-on.
Not
many
people
care
about
audiobooks,
though.
James
Altucher:
And
it
adds
to
on
Amazon,
on
the
Amazon
page,
it
adds
a
level
of
professionalism
when
you
see
three
lines
Kindle,
paperback,
audio.
Tucker
Max:
We
use
Bang
Publishing
as
our
printer.
Bang
in
Minnesota.
I
shouldn't
give
all
my
secrets
away,
but
I
don't
care.
It's
fine.
Tucker
Max:
You
should.
Like,
of
course
I'm
gonna
tell
you
it.
No,
there's
a
bunch
of
different
printers.
Most
of
them
charge
way
too
much.
A
lot
of
people
use
Chinese
printers.
They're
fuckin'
terrible.
Don't
ever
use
Chinese
printers.
Even
though
they're
cheap,
they'll
fuck
you
90
percent
of
the
time.
Their
idea
of
quality
control
in
China
is
not
American
idea
of
quality
control.
Bang
Printing
in
Minnesota,
they
are
really
cheap
and
they
are
actually
the
best
quality,
or
among
they're
in
the
top
tier
of
quality.
They're
amazing,
they're
easy
to
work
with,
they're
great.
James
Altucher:
And
then
so
you
put
it
on
Amazon
and
how
many
books
have
you
got
out
there
so
far?
Tucker
Max:
Well,
we
don't
use
Bang
Bang
is
commercial
offset.
I
think
we
use
Lightning
Source
for
POD
hardcover
'cause
they
I
think
they
now
have
POD
hardcover.
James
Altucher:
And
Lightning
Source
will
get
you
on
Amazon,
will
get
you
in
Barnes
BN.com.
Do
they
get
you
in
bookstores?
Tucker
Max:
No,
it's
available
to
purchase,
to
order
in
bookstores.
We
can't
put
anyone
in
bookstores
'cause
we
don't
have
I
have
a
distribution
deal
with
Simon
and
Schuster,
so
an
author
who
has
a
great
book
that
I
actually
think
is
really
good,
I
can
push
that
to
Simon
and
ask
them
if
they
want
it,
but
no
one
can
guarantee
you
in
bookstores
except
publishers
'cause
publishers
are
the
only
ones
that
have
relationships
with
bookstores.
But
honestly,
being
in
a
bookstore
doesn't
really
matter
that
much
anymore.
I
mean,
unless
if
you're
doing
big
fiction,
it
matters.
If
you're
doing
a
few
big
public
releases,
it
matters.
The
reality
is
the
book
landscape
is
totally
changed.
James
Altucher:
What
percentage
is
Amazon
right
now
for
everything?
Kindle,
paperback
and
Tucker
Max:
It's
hard
to
know
'cause
Amazon
doesn't
release
their
numbers,
right.
But
from
what
most
people
can
tell,
it's
anywhere
from
40
to
70
percent
of
book
sales,
depending
on
the
book.
James
Altucher:
And
for,
like,
what
categories
would
you
say
it
reaches,
like,
80
or
90
percent?
Tucker
Max:
Oh,
genre
fiction.
It's
huge.
James Altucher: So if you're writing a genre novel, who cares about bookstores?
Tucker
Max:
If
you're
writing
genre
fiction,
unless
you're
one
of
the
big,
big
names
in
genre
fiction,
you
basically
are
selling
everything
on
Kindle
or
iBooks.
Like,
the
vampire
novels,
like
you
know
Sean
Platt.
He's
a
good
buddy
of
mine.
So
Sean,
I
don't
think
he's
Tucker
Max:
I
don't
think
any
of
his
books
are
yeah,
write,
publish,
repeat,
but
it's
more
about
novelist
stuff,
and
it's
much
more,
like,
his
polemic
on
if
you
care
about
the
politics
of
publishing,
it's
a
great
book.
If
you're
just
someone
who
wants
a
book,
it's
not
what
you
should
read
at
all.
It's
a
very
different
sort
of
thing.
All
genre
fiction
almost
is
it's
Amazon
is
dominating
it
because
most
people
genre
fiction,
for
the
most
part,
is
disposable.
Like,
it's,
like,
pulpy,
you
know.
I
don't
mean
that
as
an
insult;
it's
just
people
if
you
read,
like,
romance
novels,
you
read
60
a
year.
You
don't
read
two
a
year,
right.
Women
and
James
Altucher:
Right.
So
you're
not
going
to
the
bookstore,
and
also
with
the
Kindle,
nobody
knows
on
the
subway
what
you're
reading.
Tucker
Max:
Well,
right.
So,
listen,
genre
fiction
still
sells
in
physical
copies,
make
no
mistake
about
it,
especially
urban
genre
fiction.
So,
like,
stuff
written
for,
like,
black
people
sells
huge,
huge.
Tucker
Max:
Yes.
Bookstores
and,
like,
bodegas.
You
walk
around
New
York
City,
you
can
see,
you
know,
like
I
mean,
those
actually
still
sell
really,
really
well,
but
there's
a
big
basically
the
younger
the
genre
fiction
aims
towards,
the
sort
of
the
more
dominant
Kindle
is,
but
even
things
like
romance
fiction
romance
novels
are
becoming
dominant
on
digital
because
they're
so
much
cheaper,
it's
so
much
easier
to
deal
with,
they're
disposable,
it's
so
much
more
it's
like
it
is
just
a
better
experience
top
to
bottom,
especially
if
you
use
fiction
as
sort
of
a
primary
form
of
entertainment,
and
there
aren't
a
lot
of
people
in
America
that
do
it,
at
least
compared
to
TV,
but
there's
still
tens
of
millions.
It's
not
like
some
little
tiny
niche,
you
know.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
like
just
some
numbers,
I
dont
know
them.
Like,
how
many
books
were
published
in
the
last
year?
Tucker
Max:
Oh,
that's
a
whole
separate
thing.
That's
actually
a
really
good
question.
I'm
not
exactly
if
you
told
me
this,
I
could
have
looked
it
up
and
found
it
before
the
podcast.
I
know,
like,
three
years
ago
or
something
like
that,
there
were
basically,
like,
50,000
books
that
came
out
of
major
publishers,
like
the
big
at
the
time,
big
six
or
whatever.
There
are
about
50
those
and
then,
like,
Perseus
and
some
of
the
other
really
big
ones.
There
were
about
50,000
that
would
come
out
of
what
we
would
call
a
major
publisher.
There
were
about
500,000
that
were
self-published,
and
that
includes,
you
know,
the
goofy
computer-generated
books
and
all
the
other
nonsense.
So
it
was
about
a
10X
difference.
I
think
both
numbers
have
gone
up
substantially
in
the
last
three
years.
I
think
like,
it
depends
what
your
definition
of
mainstream
publishers
are,
but
that
number
is
almost
certainly
in
the
six
figures
now.
I
think
it
might
even
be,
like,
substantially
in
the
six
figures,
and
the
self-publishing
is
almost
certainly
in
the
millions
now.
But
you
have
to
remember,
like,
80
percent
of
the
self-published
stuff,
like,
sells
less
than
five
copies
or
something.
You
know,
it's
not
it's,
like,
just
either
kooky
person
stuff
or
there's
a
lot
of
companies
that
do,
like,
these
computer-generated
books
and,
like,
they
sell
20
copies
and
they
don't
care
or
whatever.
It's,
like,
those
numbers
are
juiced
in
a
way
that's
sorta
weird.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
it's
kinda
funny,
actually.
Like,
I'm
starting
to
see
like,
I
saw
this
with
Choose
Yourself
and
The
Power
of
No
that
Claudia
and
I
wrote
together
James
Altucher:
Right
away,
somebody
will
come
out
with
yeah,
a
summary,
a
weird
summary
that
has
nothing
to
do
with
anything.
Tucker
Max:
No.
Right.
Because
if
they
can
sell,
you
know,
ten
whatever,
20
copies
a
month
of
people
mistakenly
buying
that
instead
of
Choose
Yourself,
that's,
like,
whatever,
$100
for
them.
And
if
they
can
have
100
of
those,
then
they're
making,
whatever,
$10,000
a
month,
and
then
they're
gonna
write
some
scammy
blog
post.
I
mean,
these
are
basically
scammers.
They're
trying
to
scam
the
system,
and
I
think
Amazon
if
you
bet
against
Amazon
in
the
long
run,
you're
almost
certainly
gonna
lose.
The
scammers
are
betting
against
Amazon.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
So
you
can
make
short-term
money
doing
that.
It's
not
a
good
long-term
strategy.
I
don't
pay
any
attention
to
it.
I
don't
think
it's
gonna
work.
There
are
some
publishers,
like
I
know
I
talked
to
this
one
publisher,
brand
new,
they're
I
probably
shouldn't
even
talk
about
where
they
are,
but
they
are
not
algorithmically
publishing
books.
What
he's
done
is
he's
almost
done
the
Book
in
a
Box
model,
like
what
I
have,
except
the
reverse.
Like,
we
charge
only
for
services
and
expertise
and
time,
right.
We
you
know,
if
you
come
to
us,
you
it's
your
book.
You
own
it,
you
get
all
the
royalties,
if
it
becomes
a
Hollywood
movie,
it's
yours.
Like,
it's
your
thing.
We're
just
doing
you
a
service,
right.
He
goes
the
other
way
around.
He
pays
content
like,
writers
to
create
content
for
him.
He
has
basically
a
team
of
dudes
that
algorithmically
figure
out,
okay,
what's
really
hot
in
cookbooks.
Okay,
paleo
and
gluten
free
and
these
so
let's
turn
out,
like,
six
different
cookbooks
that
are
in
these
little
mini
verticals,
and
he
actually
does
pretty
good
content.
Like,
he
hires
real
photographers,
real
writers,
they
do
good
stuff,
and
those
things
but
it's
not
like
an
author.
It's
like
the
publishing
company.
James Altucher: But that motto works too. Like, you know, Steve Scott.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
yeah.
He's
kinda
made
a
specialty
of
the
habit
space.
He
writes
a
book
every
three
weeks,
and
the
guy
makes,
like,
a
decent
living.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah.
He
does
pretty
well.
This
guy's
company's
doing
really
well.
He
wants
us
to
do
he
wants
to
get
in
the
celebrity
memoir
space
and
help
build
sort
of
empires
around
celebrities
and
sort
of
disposable
content,
and
I
think
we're
gonna
start
doing
books
we
may
start
doing
books
with
his
company.
We're
gonna
do
the
actual
book
with
the
celebrity
'cause
he
doesn't
want
a
dog
shit
book.
He
wants
a
real
book
with
a
real
memoir
with
a
celeb.
James
Altucher:
I
see.
So
he'll
find
the
celebrity,
he'll,
like,
buy
the
rights
to
the
celebrity's
book
story
and
then
hire
you.
Tucker
Max:
Right,
right.
The
celebrity
will
commit
to
40
hours
on
the
phone.
We
will
it'll
be
our
process,
our
sort
of
our
____.
James
Altucher:
That's
a
smart
idea
for
both
sides
for
all
three
sides,
it's
a
smart
idea.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah,
it's
smart
for
all
three
sides.
That's
exactly
right.
I
think
it
can
work
really
well.
James
Altucher:
So
how
will
you
do
it
with
fiction?
Like,
will
you
kinda
take
a
very
stand
like,
let's
say
it's
genre
fiction.
Will
you
take
a
very
standard
story
structure
and
then
apply
it
to
someone's
ideas
or
life
or
Tucker Max: So the long-term not long it's not really that long-term.
James
Altucher:
Reminds
me
a
little,
by
the
way,
of
James
Frey's
strategy
from
a
couple
years
ago.
He
was
kind
of
Tucker
Max:
He's
pumping
out
he's
basically
taking
James
James
Patterson,
James
Frey
both
basically
have
content
studios,
right.
And
they're
essentially
trying
to
almost
like
what
movie
studios
are
to
movies,
they
are
trying
to
do
to
books
and
to
fiction,
right.
And
that
can
like,
the
sort
of
genius
working
with
a
team
of
copywriters,
essentially
is
what
they
are,
that
can
absolutely
work.
We're
doing
the
opposite,
right.
We
are
providing
an
algorithm
a
structure
a
platform
so
that
anyone
can
essentially
write
a
book
without
having
to
go
through
all
the
unnecessary
pain
points.
So
all
you
my
goal
is
to
create
a
platform
so
that
all
you
have
to
do
is
have
great
ideas
and
you
can
turn
them
into
books
without
having
you
don't
have
to
learn
to
write.
You
dont
have
to
find
time
to
write.
You
don't
have
to
deal
with
the
publishing
process.
You
don't
have
to,
like,
you
know,
design
the
cover.
You
don't
have
to
deal
with
Amazon.
We
do
all
the
shitty
stuff.
All
you
have
to
do
is
have
great
ideas,
whether
they're
story
ideas
for
fiction
or
whether
they're
whatever,
self-help
ideas
for
nonfiction
or
whatever
nonfiction
you
do.
Anything
like
that,
we
are
sort
of
it's
books
as
a
process,
you
know.
James
Altucher:
So
let's
say
someone
wants
to
come
to
you
prepared.
So
they
you
know,
let's
say
they
have
some
skills
as
a
writer,
but
they're
running
a
business
so
they
need
the
book
out
but
they
just
don't
have
the
time
'cause
it
takes
a
long
time
and
dedication.
Tucker
Max:
But
the
book
is
a
legion
for
their
business,
which
is
very
popular.
We
have
a
ton
of
those
clients.
James
Altucher:
So
what
kind
of
skills
even
skills
as
a
writer
should
someone
ideally
bring
to
the
table
_____?
James Altucher: So they don't need any of those. Even outline abilities.
Tucker
Max:
No.
No.
Because,
I
mean,
like,
if
you
have
it,
great.
It'll
probably
make
the
process
faster.
You
don't
need
it.
That's
the
whole
point
of
our
process.
I
mean,
think
about
like,
think
about
how
ridiculous
it
would
be
if
Uber
made
you
drive
the
car.
It's
like,
why
the
hell
call
Uber,
right.
It's
ridiculous
if
we
make
people
do
part
of
the
work.
Like,
that
doesn't
make
sense.
That's
why
you're
paying
us,
right.
And
so
James
Altucher:
I
wonder
how
you
can
apply
it
to
other
things
too
'cause,
like,
you
figure
so
there's
books,
there's
nonfiction
books
and
you
divide
it
out
into
three
categories.
And
there's
fiction,
screenplays
Tucker
Max:
You're
getting
you're
killing
me,
dude.
You're
gonna
give
away
our
business
model.
Right,
no,
that's
exactly
you're
totally
right.
Obviously,
like,
you're
too
smart
to
for
you
not
to
understand
this.
Once
we
nail
nonfiction,
we
wanna
do
fiction.
Once
we
do
fiction,
we
wanna
try
and
see
what
other
things
this
works
for.
I
think
it
can
work
for
screenplays.
I
think
it
can
work
for
TV
shows.
I
think
it
can
work
for
speeches.
I
think
it
can
work
for
pitch
decks,
you
know,
like
Excel-type,
you
know,
presentations,
startup
pitch
decks.
Anything
like
that,
I
think
it
can
absolutely
work
for.
In
fact,
I
think
it
can
work
for
this
is
a
little
bit
crazy,
but
I
think
it
can
work
for
essentially
any
creative
endeavor
painting,
music,
whatever
because
if
you
think
about
it,
creating
like,
becoming
a
painter
involves,
like,
this
fuckin'
difficult
process
of
learning
all
the
skills
involved,
right.
And,
like,
what
if
you
could
somehow
eliminate
all
of
the
all
of
the
pain
points
of
learning
those
skills
and
you
could
just
transfer
sort
of
your
the
image
in
your
head
to
the
page
somehow,
right.
Like,
how
does
that
work?
What
does
that
look
like?
And
clearly
that's
years
away
from
what
we're
doing.
James
Altucher:
You
know,
it's
funny.
It
reminds
me,
actually,
I
ran
into
someone
who
was
doing
something
slightly
different,
but
this
person
was
a
professional
forger,
so
she
would
they
would
take
a
photograph,
like
a
nice
photograph,
they
would
blow
it
up
and
then
put
it
on
a
canvas
and
or
print
it
onto
a
canvas
and
then
use
oil
paints
to
paint
over
the
photograph
and
then
people
would
sell
would
buy
the
paintings
for,
like,
tens
of
thousands
of
dollars
because
no
one
would
think
to
scrape
the
paint
off
to
see
that
there
was
a
photograph
underneath.
James Altucher: So it wouldn't be quite like that, but it just reminds me of that.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah,
it's
something
like
that.
Like,
I'm
not
sure
what
that
would
look
like,
right,
because
I'm
focused
on
books
right
now,
but
my
real
mission
is
I
think
it
can
be
way
easier
for
people
to
create
all
sorts
of
different,
whatever
you
wanna
call
it,
art,
creative
products.
Even
if
you
don't
wanna
call
a
nonfiction
book
a
piece
of
art,
at
the
very
least,
it's
a
creative
product,
right.
And
I
think
that
it
would
be
really
cool
if
people
could
put
their
take
their
ideas
and
effectuate
them.
If
you
can
reduce
the
obstacles
to
that,
then
that
adds
a
lot
of
value
to
the
world.
James
Altucher:
See,
what
I
like
about
this
business
is
and
this
is
typical
of
businesses
that
I
like
is
that
you
actually
should
never
raise
money,
for
instance,
for
this
business.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
yeah.
And
also
there's
nothing
you
need
to
spend
the
money
on.
Like,
you're
just
gonna
grow
you
could
hire
as
you
grow
and
fire
as
you
not
grow
or
whatever.
Tucker
Max:
WE
have
no
employees
right
now.
It's
me
and
Zach,
cofounders.
We're
about
to
hire
our
first
employee.
He's
gonna
be
a
project
manager.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
'cause
you
need
someone
to
when
you
have
enough
projects
when
you
have
more
than
ten,
you
need
logistics.
Tucker
Max:
So
we're
I
think
we
just
signed
a
client
somewhere
between
20
and
30.
I
can't
keep
up.
So
we
definitely
need
a
project
manager
'cause
Zach's
doing
all
that
now.
We're
gonna
pass
to
the
project
manager,
and
then
everyone
else
we
use
is
a
freelancer,
you
know,
and
so,
like,
we
can
obviously
we
could
hire
a
lot
of
these
people
internally,
but
that
doesn't
make
any
sense.
We
could
probably
pay
them
less
and
hire
them
internally.
I
would
actually
much
rather
them
be
freelancers
because
I
think
they'll
work
harder.
I
think
they'll
do
a
better
job.
I
think
they
can
make
more
money
and
we
can
get
better
product.
James
Altucher:
Well,
it's
almost
better
we're
moving
toward
this
employee-less
society
where
it's
better
for
everybody
not
to
get
fired
and
hired
and
you
don't
have
to
deal
with
the
paperwork,
and
it
becomes
what
essentially
you
are
is
you're
becoming
the
Uber
of
book
making.
So
that's
what's
happening.
Tucker Max: Can I tell you what's really exciting about this?
Tucker
Max:
I
don't
wanna
talk
about
this
on
podcast
'cause
I'm
afraid
someone's
gonna
steal
the
idea,
but
Tucker
Max:
'Cause
no
one's
gonna
____.
People
will
steal
the
idea,
but
no
one
will
execute
it.
James
Altucher:
Right.
That's
actually
an
important
thing.
You
can
share
any
idea
and
nobody
executes.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Unless
it's
super
unless
they
just
have
to
do
one
thing
or
something.
James
Altucher:
And
also,
don't
forget,
there's
expertise.
You're
one
of
three
so
maybe
Malcolm
Gladwell
will
steal
the
idea.
Like,
you're
one
of
three
people
who
were,
like,
three
times
on
the
same
time
on
the
New
York
Times
bestselling
list.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah,
so
here's
what
I
really
wanna
do.
So
right
now,
our
service
is,
you
know,
is
very
expensive,
right.
And
like
I
said,
I
mean,
I
just
outlined
the
basics
of
exactly
what
we
do.
Anyone
can
do
this.
This
is
this
process
requires
no
like,
there's
no
special
proprietary
algorithm
that
you
can't
figure
out
or
whatever,
right?
You
can
do
this.
You
know
what
I
really
wanna
do
is
I
wanna
keep
the
high-end
service,
no
doubt,
because
there
will
always
be
a
big
market
for
people
who
have
money
but
no
time
and
want
us
to
do
the
work
for
them.
All
they
have
to
do
is
talk.
There's
always
gonna
be
a
big
market
for
that.
We're
always
gonna
be
there
for
that.
But
I
wanna
extend
our
service
to
people
who
have
a
lot
of
time
but
no
money,
and
the
way
we
can
do
the
way
we
can
make
this
Book
in
a
Box
process
work
for
people
who
can't
afford
$15,000;
who
maybe
can
only
afford,
let's
say
$500
or
$1,000,
is
we
make
it
software
as
a
service.
James
Altucher:
Oh
my
God,
I
totally
figured
it
out.
So
you
could
have
people
call
into
a
phone
number
where
the
phone
call
comes
in
Tucker Max: No, why call? They can do it through their computer.
James
Altucher:
So
it's
asking
like,
there's
the
questions
are
all
planned,
and
then
you
have,
like,
kind
of
a
CreateSpace-type
thing
where
you
can
design
the
book
cover
and
beginning
to
end.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
And
then
what
I
think
is
really
cool
so
we
can
have
it
where
it's,
like,
you
know,
maybe
James Altucher: Yeah, outsourced to India where take out the ums and the ahs.
Tucker
Max:
Exactly.
____
transcription
whenever.
I
think
we
have
it
all
different
price
tiers.
So
it's
maybe,
like,
$100
and
you
have
to
do
everything
yourself,
but
it's
step-by-step
instructions,
right.
And
then
maybe,
like,
let's
say
you
wanna
do
everything
yourself
except
the
book
cover.
You
just
don't
wanna
design
that,
and
you've
got
$500.
You
wanna
get
a
nice
book
cover.
So
then
you
can
buy
a
$500
book
cover.
Like,
we
handle
paying
the
designer,
we
handle
finding
them,
et
cetera,
et
cetera.
It's
sorta
like
99
Designs
except
you
don't
have
to
go
to
99
Designs.
You
just
we
just
do
it.
You're,
like,
here's
my
budget.
I
want
the
best
one
possible
for
it.
You
know
you're
gonna
get
a
good
cover.
They
know
they're
gonna
the
designer
knows
they're
gonna
get
paid.
You
can
upgrade
you
can
essentially
level
up
at
any
part
of
the
process
you
want.
You
get
stuck
somewhere,
for
$10.00
an
hour,
you
can
have
or
$10.00
a
call,
you
can
have
a
professional
editor
come
on
and
read
through
and
help
you,
you
know,
whatever.
Like,
there's
a
million
ways
to
do
it,
but
it's
essentially
software
as
a
service
with
an
opportunity
to
level
up
at
every
single
spot.
So
some
people
will
spend
$5,000;
some
people
will
spend
$50.00;
but
everyone
now
is
essentially
on
an
even
playing
field
to
get
their
ideas
out
there.
James
Altucher:
Okay,
so
then
Part
2,
which
I
forget
if
we
talked
about
it
offline
or
online,
but
Part
2,
which
is
book
marketing.
So
a
lot
of
people
don't
care
about
book
marketing
because
the
book
becomes
their
business
card
and
they
send
it
out
to
all
the
clients
and
whatever.
But
other
people,
particularly
fiction,
when
you
get
into
that,
other
people
are
gonna
wanna
sell,
you
know,
lots
of
books.
So
how
do
you
how
will
you
deal
with
and
make
it
as
service-oriented
as
possible?
How
do
you
standardize
the
book
marketing
process?
Tucker
Max:
That's
a
tough
question.
So
right
now,
with
Book
in
a
Box,
we
have
a
marketing
package,
sort
of
like
a
mini-launch
with
the
$25,000
package.
We
do,
like,
sort
of
like
ten
different
things,
and
it's
not
like
a
major,
like,
James
Altucher
or
Tim
Ferriss
book
launch,
but
it's,
you
know,
something
good
for
most
people,
right.
There's
it
gives
a
lot
of
good
social
proof
for
their
books.
James Altucher: You schedule a ____ at AMA. You could make a Facebook fan page.
Tucker
Max:
Right,
you
know,
like
press
release,
put
people
on
a
couple
podcasts,
things
like
that.
Really
basic
things,
right.
Give
them
a
couple
guest
posts.
Things
that,
like,
for
the
vast
majority
of
people,
that's
more
than
enough
social
proof
and
they're,
like,
really
happy,
and
it
gives
their
book
the
social
proof
they
need
for
their
book
to
accomplish
their
goal,
right.
A
CEO
to
put
on
his
resume
or,
you
know,
business
owner
to
generate
leads
or
a
speaker
to
charge
more
or
a
consultant
to
get
new
clients,
things
like
that,
right.
Yes,
that's
a
good
question.
What
about
the
people
that
really
wanna,
like
that
don't
have
another
use
for
the
book.
The
book
is
the
end
in
itself.
That's
a
very
difficult
thing
because
now
you're
getting
into
discovery,
which
is
a
totally
different
business
than
content
creation,
right.
I
know
some
people,
one
person
specifically,
who's
working
on
this,
and
we're
working
with
him
to
try
and
help
him
develop
sort
of,
for
lack
of
a
better
term,
book
marketing
in
a
box-type
process,
but
the
thing
is,
I
don't
know
if
there's
an
algorithmic
process
where
you
can
do
this.
The
best
you
can
do
James
Altucher:
A
lot
of
it
is
there's
a
magic
in
there.
Like,
how
did
50
Shades
of
Gray
out
of
the
blue,
you
know,
sell
tens
of
millions
of
copies?
Like,
nobody
really
knows
the
answer.
Tucker
Max:
That's
its
own
podcast,
yeah.
Right.
I
think
the
best
you
can
do
with
book
marketing
is
you
can
ask
people
a
bunch
of
questions
and
then,
based
on
their
answers,
you
can
recommend
a
couple
strategies
and
then
give
them
guides
on
how
to
effectuate
those
strategies.
James Altucher: 'Cause they need to do stuff. The author needs to do stuff.
James
Altucher:
Like,
the
author
need
it
seems
like
the
author
needs
to
already
be
engaged
in
the
conversation
with
their
community.
Like,
take
your
books.
You
had
a
huge
community
already
when
Book
1
came
out.
James
Altucher:
So
those
people
automatically
went
to
the
bookstore
and
bought
the
books.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Right.
So
if
you
don't
have
like,
you
have,
you
know,
$30,000
to
hire
Ryan
Holliday
or
Charlie
Hoehn
to
promote
your
book,
right.
And
so
they
do
all
this
stuff.
But
if
you
don't
have
that
money,
what
do
you
do?
I
think
a
book
marketing
in
a
box-type,
like,
algorithmic
program
could
work
really
well,
but
what
it's
gotta
do
is
teach
people,
like,
tell
them,
okay,
here's
ten
possible
things.
Figure
out
what
makes
the
most
sense
with
you,
and
then
here's
a
guide
on
how
to
do
each
thing.
Like,
here's
how
to
set
up
a
Reddit
AMA.
Here's
how
to
pitch
bloggers.
Here's
how
to
whatever,
things
like
that,
right.
I
think
that
could
work
really
well
because
right
now,
there's
really
not
a
lot
of
great
information
on
how
to
book
market,
and
it's
all
over
the
place.
Fiction's
totally
different
than
nonfiction.
Certain
types
of
nonfiction
or
whatever,
and
what
this
could
do
is
sort
of
essentially
be
like
a
choose-your-own-adventure
type
thing
where
you
depending
on
what
your
goals
are,
what
your
resources
are,
how
much
work
you
wanna
put
in,
et
cetera,
et
cetera,
it's
a
different
answer
for
what
you
should
do
for
book
marketing
for
everybody,
right.
So
a
process
like
that
that
kind
of
algorithmically
help
people
figure
out
what's
the
right
answer
and
then
how
do
I
do
that,
people
would
pay,
you
know,
a
few
hundred
bucks
for
that
and
be
extremely
valuable
for
them,
and
I
think
that
would
be
a
really
good
sort
of
process,
but
I
think
that's
a
different
thing
than
Book
in
a
Box.
It's
just
that
book
discovery
and
book
marketing
is
just
such
a
different
thing
than
creating
a
book.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
'cause
there's
a
little
bit
of
art
there
as
well
as
science,
and
mystery
in
the
middle.
James
Altucher:
But
still
there's,
like,
the
basic
things.
Like
you
said,
like
scheduling
the
Reddit
AMA,
setting
up
the
introductions
to
podcasts,
stuff
like
that.
So
how's
it
going
with
your
podcast?
Tucker
Max:
We're
gonna
pass,
I
think,
a
million
downloads
before
or
by
the
end
of
the
year.
James
Altucher:
That's
great.
And,
you
know,
Jeff
Miller,
of
course,
was
on
this
podcast.
He
did
very
well.
Very
interesting.
Evolutionary
psychologist
on
how
to
meet
women
or
men
or
whatever.
And
then
you
guys
are
writing
a
book
together.
James Altucher: Yeah, that's good. So I'm looking forward to that one as well.
James
Altucher:
Man,
we're
gonna
have,
like,
nonstop
repeat
we
have
to
have
you
on
when
your
kid's
15
years
old.
We
have
to
have
you
on
when
you
start
doing
fiction
and
then
when
The
Mating
Grounds
comes
out,
we'll
have
you
on.
Tucker Max: Well, have Jeff on for that. He'll probably be better for it than me.
James Altucher: Yeah, no, we'll have both on. Now we've got this table here.
Tucker
Max:
Right,
you've
got
this
setup
here.
It's
pretty
sweet.
James
Altucher:
So
yeah.
And
Jeff
was
a
good
guest,
though.
He
was
fun.
And
then
he
answered
separately
a
separate
question
we
had.
So
Claudia
and
I
were
in
Miami,
and
we
were
wondering
why
everybody
had
blonde
hair.
So
typically
women
who
are
in
their
40s
or
50s
don't
have
blond
hair.
James
Altucher:
So
he
said
that,
because
women
so
I
wrote
him,
Jeff,
you
know,
Dr.
Miller,
why
do
all
these
women
dye
their
hair
blonde?
And
he
said,
well,
it's,
you
know,
because
women
don't
tend
to
have
blonde
hair
when
they're
older,
when
they're
younger
and
because
men
are
seeking
who
are
fertile,
so
they
do
this
to,
you
know,
send
out
the
signal
that
they're
fertile,
even
if
they're
not,
to
men.
Tucker
Max:
Right.
Well,
send
out
the
signal
that
they're
young,
which
is
a
secondary
signal
that
they're
fertile.
Blonde
hair,
that's
why
breast
implants
are
so
popular.
That's
why
men
care
about
big
breasts
because
large
voluptuous
breasts
are
an
indice
of
youth.
It's
like
an
honest
signal
of
youth.
Biologically
it's
an
honest
signal
of
youth.
Yeah,
it's
because
humans
are
neotenized.
I
can
go
deep
into
the
biology,
but
it's
exactly
right.
Tucker
Max:
You
know
what's
funny?
Everyone
thinks
I
named
it
Book
in
a
Box
because
of
the
Saturday
Night
Live
skit,
dick
in
a
box,
right.
And
I
didn't
even
think
about
that.
No,
I
was,
like,
the
point
is
supposed
to
be
it's
like
everything
you
need
for
a
book,
just,
like,
in
a
box,
like
really
simple,
right,
and
it
floated
off
the
tongue.
But
now
it's
like,
everyone's
like,
oh,
Tucker,
you're
making
a
fuckin'
joke
about
dick
in
a
box.
I'm,
like,
no
I'm
not
really.
James
Altucher:
Well,
you
had
the
the
rough
draft
of
the
book
I
saw,
Bookstrapper,
you
didn't
like
that
name?
Tucker
Max:
Well,
no,
no.
So
well,
that
was
a
different
book.
That
was
about
book
marketing,
and
so
it's
funny.
Book
in
a
Box
emerged
out
of
I
had
a
publishing
sort
of
company.
We
did,
like,
consulting
and
some
publishing
work,
and
then
a
little
bit
we
did
some
book
marketing
and
then,
like,
I
had
all
these
other
things,
and
once
Book
in
a
Box
took
off,
I
actually
I
shut
all
those
things
down.
James
Altucher:
And
you
love
it.
Like,
you
feel
it.
James
Altucher:
Like,
if
it
has
$10
million
of
revenues,
Amazon
offers
you
$70
million,
you
might
take
it.
Tucker
Max:
I'm
probably
gonna
take
it,
right.
Like,
let's
not
be
ridiculous.
I'm
not
stupid.
Right.
'Cause
I'm
not
gonna
fight
with
Amazon.
If
they
come
in
with
a
check,
all
right,
Amazon,
there
you
go.
James
Altucher:
Right
because
they
could
do
it,
not
I
mean,
people
always
say,
oh
Google
can
do
this
or
Amazon
can
do
this.
The
reality
is,
big
companies
usually
don't
do
entrepreneurial
ventures.
They
buy
them.
Tucker
Max:
They
buy
them,
right.
Yeah,
so
no,
like,
I
mean,
it's
not
I
do
love
the
company,
but
it's
more
like
one
of
the
things
I
learned,
man,
is
I
gotta
focus.
Like,
I
was
doing
way
too
many
things,
so
the
only
shit
I
do
now
businesswise,
Book
in
a
Box
and
Mating
Grounds.
That's
it.
That's
all
I
do.
James
Altucher:
I
think
that's
really
smart
because
this
is
also
these
are
the
things
you
love
doing,
yet
you
can
only
do
stuff
that
you
feel
it
in
your
chest.
Like,
this
is
what
puts
you
on
fire.
And
then
you're
going
to
do
good
at
it
because
you'll
know
exactly
what
to
do
in
every
decision.
Tucker
Max:
Well,
and
you
just
have
time
to
dedicate,
man.
You
only
have
so
many
hours
in
the
I
mean,
I
have
a
family
now,
so
they
get
a
huge
block
of
time,
and
then
I
have
to,
like,
spend
a
little
time,
like,
you
know,
on
myself.
So
I
only
have,
whatever,
let's
call
it
eight
hours
a
day
of
real
work
time
that
I
can
dedicate
to
stuff.
And
if
I'm
splitting
that
across
three
or
four
or
five
things,
then
everything
gets
shit.
It's
like
the
James
Altucher:
Well,
but
it's
interesting,
though,
because
there's
focus
and
there's
focus.
So
you're
doing
Book
in
the
Box,
but
Book
in
the
Box
is
doing
20
books.
But
because
you've
standardized
and
processed
it
out,
you're
able
to
kind
of
concentrate
you're
able
to
take
variety
and
turn
it
into
focus,
and
that's
the
key,
really.
Tucker
Max:
Well,
my
job
I
explained
this
to
Zach
'cause
we're
kind
of
like
co
we're
cofounders.
I'm
the
CEO,
he's
the
COO,
but
what
I
explained
is
our
job
as
cofounders
is
to
create
stable
ground
for
our
employees
and
freelancers
to
stand
on
and
do
the
actual
work,
right.
And
so
once
we
have
the
process
I
mean,
the
last
three
months
have
been
hell
getting
this
process
right,
tons
of
work,
but
once
we
get
it
right,
it's
like
we
can
plug
in
any
capable,
smart
sort
of
writing
editing
freelancer,
and
they're
gonna
do
a
fantastic
job,
and
we
can
have
one
really
smart,
capable
project
manager,
and
those
two
people
are
gonna
get
98
percent
of
the
stuff
right
on
their
own
and
then
we're
always
there
when
there's
a
problem,
whatever,
right.
Yeah,
so,
like,
we
just
have
to
create
the
stable
ground
and
then,
like,
you
know,
we
start
doing
software
as
a
service,
all
right,
then
we
have
that's
where
we
focus
on
is
creating
something
out
of
nothing
and
making
it
awesome,
and
then
someone
else
comes
along
to
run
it
once
it's
awesome,
you
know.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
no,
I
actually
I'm
jealous.
I
think
this
is
a
great
business
idea.
This
is
good.
Tucker
Max:
I
think
it
is
pretty
good
too.
I
know,
that's
the
best
part
is
we
don't
have
to
raise
money.
We're
already,
like
I
think
we
realistically
are
gonna
do
about
$500,000
gross
in
the
first
six
months.
Tucker
Max:
That's
like,
I
mean,
that's
gross.
Our
margins
are
pretty
good.
They're
not
amazing.
I
think
we
can
get
them
amazing.
James
Altucher:
You
don't
have
to
worry
about
it
so
much
yet
'cause
they'll
get
better
too.
Tucker
Max:
They'll
get
better.
Yeah,
as
we
systematize
the
process
more
and
we
find
sort
of
better
balance
of
freelancers,
stuff
like
that.
The
most
important
thing
for
us
now
is
getting
the
books
awesome,
making
sure
they're
really
awesome,
and
so
we're,
like,
working
with
the
most
expensive
people
for
the
most
part,
so
we
don't
have
amazing
margins,
but
they're
good.
James
Altucher:
But
imagine
when
the
next
real
estate
guy
comes
to
you.
You're
gonna
know
the
outline
already,
so
it's
just
James
Altucher:
a
lot
of
things
that
the
more
books
you
do,
the
better
your
margins
are
gonna
be.
They're
not
gonna
get
'cause
you're
always
gonna
have
that
really
professional
freelancer
who's
gonna
cost
X.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
so
but
you
should
be
able
to
get
up
to
a
solid,
like,
you
know,
30,
40
percent
margins,
like,
done
right,
so
Tucker
Max:
Way
better.
We're
gonna
do
better
than
that.
We're
a
little
bit
better
than
that
now,
and
I
think
we
can
really
optimize
margins
without
losing
I
mean,
that's
the
key.
Optimize
margins
without
losing
quality,
obviously.
James Altucher: I mean, basically every CEO in the Fortune 500 should have a book.
Tucker
Max:
Oh
yeah,
every
CEO,
every
entrepreneur,
every
speaker,
every
consultant.
They
should
all
have
books.
James
Altucher:
You
should
almost
take
every
TED
talk,
make
a
book
out
of
it
and
then
call
the
guy
and
say,
"Hey,
I've
got
your
book
ready.
Do
you
want
it
or
not?"
Tucker
Max:
Well,
but
if
they
say
no,
I
can't
sell
it,
so
what
am
I
gonna
do
when
they
say
no?
Just
sit
there
with
a
book?
James
Altucher:
You
might
be
able
to
sell
it.
Tucker
Max:
Yeah,
I'm
not
gonna
do
that.
I'm
not
gonna
sell
other
people's
ideas.
That's
_____.
James
Altucher:
All
right.
Separate
idea
for
the
listeners.
Go
out
there
and
make
TED
publishing
Tucker
Max:
That
actually
well
TED
publishes
their
own
stuff
and
they
might
come
after
you.
They're
getting
a
little
James Altucher: Just don't use the word TED. Like, okay
Tucker
Max:
Here's
the
summary.
I
heard
Ken
talk.
Here's
what
he
said,
and
it's
just
the
yeah,
the
speech.
That
would
be
pretty
scammy,
I
think.
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
that
could
be.
All
right.
Well,
Tucker,
great.
Congratulations
Book
in
a
Box
and
fatherhood.
So
two
episodes
in
a
row.
Tucker
Max:
Thanks
a
lot.
So
how
are
you
you're
not
gonna
run
these
back-to-back,
are
you?
James
Altucher:
Yeah,
I
think
I
will.
I
think
I'll
do
next
Tuesday
and
Thursday.
What
do
you
think?
If
this
feels
all
like
too
much
for
you
visit
Tucker
Max
website
Book
in
a
Box
(http://bookinabox.com)
and
hire
them.
They
will
help
you
get
it
done.
Kindledirect.com
https://authorcentral.amazon.com/
is
the
page
where
you
will
create
your
author
page.
O THER
B OOKS
BY
J AMES
A LTUCHER
Choose Yourself
40 Alternatives To College